JP2017060878A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine which can enhance the attractiveness of a game.SOLUTION: A game machine comprises: first pattern display means which starts variation display of a first pattern using a game ball entry to a first ball entry section as a trigger; second pattern display means which starts variation display of a second pattern using a game ball entry to a second ball entry section as a trigger; and performance execution means which executes a performance. The performance execution means, when variation display of the first pattern starts and variation display of the second display starts, determines a performance to be executed using the start of the variation display of the second pattern as a trigger, on the basis of the time until the stop display of the first pattern from the time when variation display of the second pattern starts.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 5

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, various techniques have been proposed for the purpose of improving the fun of games and providing more healthy games (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2011-172988 A

  In the gaming machines as described above, further technical improvements are desired for the purpose of improving the fun of games and providing more healthy games.

  SUMMARY An advantage of some aspects of the invention is to solve at least a part of the problems described above, and the invention can be implemented as the following forms.

[Form]
First symbol display means for starting the variation display of the first symbol triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first pitching unit,
Second symbol display means for starting the variation display of the second symbol triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second pitching unit;
Production execution means for performing production,
A gaming machine comprising
The production execution means
When the first symbol starts a variable display and the second symbol starts a variable display,
Determining an effect to be executed in response to the start of the second symbol variation display based on the time from when the second symbol variation display is started until the first symbol is stopped and displayed. A featured gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine of the above form, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 30. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pattern and display surface 41a which are variably displayed in the liquid crystal display device. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine 10. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various counters. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success / failure table for 1st start openings. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success / failure table for 2nd starting openings. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the allocation table. It is a time chart explaining an example (example 1) of the processing which pachinko machine 10 performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows a skip effect. It is a time chart explaining an example (example 2) of the process which the pachinko machine 10 performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production which the pachinko machine 10 performs. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the entrance process for start ports. It is a flowchart which shows a destination determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process. It is a flowchart which shows game times control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start process for 1st start openings. It is a flowchart which shows holding information shift processing. It is a flowchart which shows the determination process for 1st start openings. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the fluctuation time for 1st start openings. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st fluctuation | variation stop process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation start process for 2nd start openings. It is a flowchart which shows the determination process for 2nd start openings. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the fluctuation time for 2nd start openings. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd fluctuation | variation stop process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the command for skipping. It is a flowchart which shows a game state transfer process. It is a flowchart which shows an opening time setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a round number setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a big prize opening / closing process. It is a flowchart which shows an entrance counter setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an open limit time setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an ending time setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer process at the time of the end of an ending period. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electronic combination support. It is a flowchart which shows a power combination opening / closing process. It is a flowchart which shows a game ball | bowl launch control process. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a command response process. It is a flowchart which shows a pending | holding command response process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st start port command response process. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd start port command response process. It is a flowchart which shows a skip execution command response process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st skip disable command response process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd skip disable command response process. It is a flowchart which shows a main process. It is a flowchart which shows a command interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows V interruption process. It is a time chart explaining an example of the process which the pachinko machine 10 in 2nd Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation start process for 1st start openings in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation start process for the 1st start port in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process (main control) in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game ball | bowl launch control process in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an abnormality detection process. It is a flowchart which shows a command response process. 10 is a flowchart showing a determination process for a first start port in Modification 4. 15 is a flowchart showing a first variation stop process in Modification 7. 16 is a flowchart showing a second variation stop process in Modification 7. It is a flowchart which shows the game times control processing in the modification 8. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation stop process in the modification 8. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a skip promotion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a skip suppression effect. It is a time chart which shows the timing which performs the skip promotion effect in the modification 11. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure (example 1) of the game board 30. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure (example 2) of the game board 30. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration of a game board 30 including a distribution mechanism 150. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows a mode that the distribution mechanism 150 distributes a game ball. FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a configuration of a game board 30 in Modification 15. 29 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a configuration of a game board 30 in Modification 16. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows a mode until the game ball discharge | released from the game ball | bowl launching mechanism 81 enters into the 2nd starting port 34d.

Embodiments of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in the following order with reference to the drawings.
A. First embodiment:
A1. Game machine structure:
A2. The electrical configuration of the gaming machine:
A3. Overview of processing by gaming machines:
A4. Various processes executed in the main controller:
A5. Electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device:
A6. Various processes executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device:
B. Second embodiment:
C. Third embodiment:
D. Fourth embodiment:
E. Variations:
F. About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments, etc .:

A. First embodiment:
A1. Game machine structure:
FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as “pachinko machine”) as an embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 combined into a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine body 12 that is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 disposed on the front surface of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13. On the back surface of the inner frame 13, control devices such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device that control the pachinko machine body 12 are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so as not to be opened and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so as not to be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation using a dedicated key on the cylinder lock 17.

  An opened window portion 18 is formed at a substantially central portion of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and electric decoration parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The electrical decoration part is comprised by the light emission means which consists of various lamps, such as LED. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the effect by turning on or blinking at the time of the big hit lottery performed by the pachinko machine 10, at the time of the big win or at the time of reaching. Further, on the back side of the front door frame 14, a glass unit 19 made of two plate glasses is disposed, and the opened window 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

  The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in a box shape having an open upper surface, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent out from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine body 12. The game balls stored in the upper plate 20 are supplied to a game ball launching mechanism provided in the pachinko machine body 12. The game ball launching mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 20 onto the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is disposed below the upper plate 20 and is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The lower plate 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 20. On the bottom surface of the lower plate 21, a discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower plate 21 is formed. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch between the closed state and the open state of the discharge port 22 by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22, and the game ball is discharged from the lower plate 21 to the outside.

  An effect operation button 24 as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for a player to perform an input operation for a game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed by the pachinko machine 10.

  Furthermore, an operation handle 25 for a player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front. When the player operates (rotates) the operation handle 25, a game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, a touch sensor 25a for permitting driving of the game ball launching mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the game ball launching by the game ball launching mechanism by a pressing operation by the player, and the operation handle 25 Is provided with a variable resistor 25c that detects the amount of rotation of the first and second rotations based on a change in electrical resistance. When the player holds the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. Then, a game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

  A game ball launch button 26 for operation by the player is provided on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 when viewed from the front. When the game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player, a game ball is launched to the front of the game board with a predetermined launch intensity regardless of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 of the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball launch button 26, the game ball is launched to the front of the game board with the same launch intensity as when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 is maximum. In the case of the present embodiment, when a game ball is launched by operating the game ball launch button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board as viewed from the front, and flows down to the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball launch button 26, the player can make a so-called “right strike”. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game ball is fired on the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball launch button 26 to release the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball launch button 26. Can be realized.

  In the present embodiment, the game ball launch button 26 is arranged on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 when viewed from the front, but the game ball launch button 26 is arranged at another position. It may be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball launch button 26 is disposed inside (peripheral portion) of the operation handle 25, similarly to the weight button 25b. In this way, the player can operate the operation handle 25, the weight button 25b, and the game ball launch button 26 only with the right hand.

  Next, the configuration of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is disposed on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10.

  FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, and a third control unit 53. Specifically, these mechanism portions are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13.

  The first control unit 51 includes a main control device 60. The main control device 60 has a main control board having a function for controlling the main game and a function for monitoring the power source. The main control board is accommodated in a board box made of a transparent resin material.

  The second control unit 52 includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The sound emission control device 90 controls light emitting means such as a speaker and various lamps provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the liquid crystal display device based on the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 90. The liquid crystal display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays images for design and production.

  The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a launch control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. The launch control device 80, when an instruction to launch a game ball is input from the main control device 60, has a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player or the operation of the game ball launch button 26. The game ball launching mechanism is controlled to launch a ball. In addition, on the back surface of the inner frame 13, a tank 54 to which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a slope that is gently inclined so that the game balls are connected to the lower side of the tank 54 and flow downstream. A tank rail 55 having a vertical position, a case rail 56 connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 55 in the vertical direction, a supply of game balls from the case rail 56, and a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out according to an instruction from the payout control device 70 A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as a payout device 71, are provided.

  Next, the game board will be described. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13.

  FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is composed of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism is guided to the guide rail 31 and released to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30 and each accessory such as a windmill is arranged. The nails 42 and the windmills distribute and organize the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

  The game board 30 includes a general winning port 32, a central first start port 33 (hereinafter also simply referred to as a first start port 33), a right first start port 44 (hereinafter also simply referred to as a first start port 44), A second start port 34, a through gate 35a, a through gate 35b, and a variable winning device 36 are provided. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display unit 45. The main display unit 45 includes a special map unit 37, a universal map unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

  The general prize opening 32 is a ball opening through which a game ball can enter and is provided on the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the general winning opening 32, ten game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

  The center first start port 33 and the right first start port 44 are entrances into which game balls can enter. The center-side first start port 33 is provided in the lower center of the game board 30, and the right first start port 44 is provided in the lower right side of the game board 30 as viewed from the front. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the center-side first start port 33 or the right first start port 44, three game balls are paid out as prize balls and a jackpot lottery described later is executed. . In addition, the right first starting port 44 is provided with an electric accessory 44a including a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the electric accessory 44a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the right first start port 44. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 44a is in an open state, the game ball can enter the right first starting port 44. The electric accessory 44a is configured to be in an open state for a predetermined period when winning a lottery executed when a game ball passes through the through gate 35b.

  The second start port 34 is a entrance for allowing game balls to enter, and is provided on the upper right side of the game board 30. More specifically, in the second start port 34, when the operation handle 25 is operated by the player so that the launch intensity of the game ball becomes the maximum intensity, or the game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player. The game ball launched by the game ball launching mechanism 81 is provided at a position where it enters. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second start port 34, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball, and a jackpot lottery described later is executed. In addition, the second start port 34 is provided with a non-electrically acting accessory 34a made up of a pair of left and right movable pieces. The non-electric accessory 34a operates from the open state to the closed state and from the closed state to the open state without using electric power. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a, the game ball can enter the second start port 34 by operating from the closed state to the open state. On the other hand, when one game ball enters the second start opening 34 when the non-electrically-operated object 34a is in the open state, the non-electrically-operated object 34a operates from the open state to the closed state. A game ball cannot enter.

  The through gate 35a and the through gate 35b are provided with through holes penetrating in the vertical direction. As described above, the through gate 35a is mechanically connected to the non-electrically-powered object 34a. When the game ball passes through the through-gate 35a, the non-electrically-powered object 34a operates from the closed state to the open state. On the other hand, the through gate 35b is a through gate serving as a trigger for executing a lottery for opening the electric accessory 44a. More specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35b, the main control device 60 performs an internal lottery (an electric-powered item opening lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the winning combination is won, the electric utility item 44a shifts to an electric combination open state that is in an open state in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35b is disposed upstream of the right first start port 44 in the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b flows down the game area PA and passes through the right side. It is possible to enter the first starting port 44. In the present embodiment, even when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a and the through gate 35b, the payout of the prize ball is not executed.

  The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a that leads to the back side of the game board 30, and an open / close door 36b that opens and closes the large winning opening 36a. The open / close door 36b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter the grand prize winning opening 36a. As described above, when a game ball enters the center side first start port 33, the right first start port 44, or the second start port 34, the main control device 60 executes a big hit lottery (internal lottery). As a result of the jackpot lottery, when the jackpot or the jackpot is won, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening / closing execution mode. The opening / closing execution mode is a mode for executing the opening / closing process of the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36. Specifically, when the open / close door 36b of the variable prize-winning device 36 shifts to the open / close execution mode, the open / close door 36b transitions from a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter to an open state in which a game ball can enter and a predetermined condition is satisfied. After that, the transition is again made to the closed state. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the large winning opening 36 a of the variable winning device 36, 15 paying balls are paid out by the payout device 71.

  An out port 43 is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 30, and game balls that have not entered the various entrances are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43.

  The special symbol unit 37 includes a first symbol display unit 37a and a second symbol display unit 37b. The 1st symbol display part 37a and the 2nd symbol display part 37b are respectively comprised by the segment indicator by which the some segment light emission part was arranged in the predetermined | prescribed aspect.

  The first symbol display unit 37a is a display unit for displaying the first symbol. The first symbol refers to a symbol that is variably displayed or stopped based on a big hit lottery triggered by a game ball entering the central first start port 33 or the right first start port 44. The 1st symbol display part 37a responds to the lottery result on the segment display when the big hit lottery triggered by the entrance of the game ball to the center side first start port 33 or the right first start port 44 is performed. As a display mode until the display is performed, the first symbol variation display or a predetermined display is performed. When the lottery is finished, the first symbol display unit 37a causes the segment display to stop display of the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

  The 2nd symbol display part 37b is a display part for displaying a 2nd symbol. The second symbol refers to a symbol that is variably displayed or stopped on the basis of a jackpot lottery triggered by a game ball entering the second start port 34. When the big winning lottery is triggered by the game ball entering the second starting port 34, the second symbol display unit 37b is displayed as a display mode until the segment indicator displays a display corresponding to the lottery result. Then, the variation display or predetermined display of the second symbol is performed. When the lottery is completed, the second symbol display unit 37b causes the second symbol display unit 37b to cause the segment display to stop display of the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

  Here, the time from the start of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b until the stop display is displayed. It is called variable time. Specifically, the time from the start of the first symbol variation display displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a to the stop display is referred to as the first variation time, and the second symbol display portion 37b The time from the start of the display of the variation of the second symbol to be displayed until the stop display is referred to as the second variation time.

  The special symbol unit 37 further includes a first hold display portion 37c made of an LED lamp at a position adjacent to the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b.

  The first hold display unit 37c displays the number of hold of the first start port (the first start port 33 on the center side and the first start port 44 on the right side) according to the color or combination of the LED lamps to be lit. In the present embodiment, a maximum of four game balls that have entered the center-side first start port 33 or the right first start port 44 are held as a total of the two first start ports. In the present embodiment, the game ball that has entered the second start port 34 is not put on hold. In other words, the condition that the second symbol is variably displayed is established based on the game ball entering the second start port 34 during the period when the second symbol is not variably displayed, while the second symbol is This is a configuration that does not hold based on the game ball entering the second start port 34 during the variable display period.

  The universal map unit 38 includes a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electrification object opening lottery is performed with the passage of the through gate 35b as an opportunity, the universal map unit 38 causes the light emitting display to be turned on, blinked, or displayed in a predetermined manner. When the electrification opening lottery is completed, the general-purpose unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

  The round display unit 39 is configured by a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games occurring in the opening / closing execution mode or displays corresponding thereto. A round game is opened and closed until either a predetermined upper limit duration elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the variable winning device 36 is satisfied. A game in which the door 36b is kept open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening / closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening / closing execution mode is ended.

  The special map unit 37, the universal map unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by a segment display or a light-emitting display using an LED lamp. For example, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, You may be comprised by the various display apparatus which can show a lottery result and a lottery result, such as a CRT or a dot matrix display.

  The variable display unit 40 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a liquid crystal display device 41. The liquid crystal display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the liquid crystal display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. Note that the configuration of the display device included in the variable display unit 40 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device 41, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

  The liquid crystal display device 41 adjusts to the case where the first symbol display unit 37a displays a variation display or a predetermined display based on the game ball entering the central first start port 33 or the right first start port 44. The display of the change of the symbol or the predetermined display is performed. In addition, the liquid crystal display device 41 is configured so that when the second symbol display unit 37b performs variation display or predetermined display based on the game ball entering the second start port 34, the symbol variation display or predetermined Is displayed. The liquid crystal display device 41 is limited to displaying a variation or predetermined display of a pattern triggered by a game ball entering the center first start port 33, the right first start port 44, or the second start port 34. In addition, an effect display or the like during the opening / closing execution mode that shifts to the case of winning the jackpot is also performed. Details of the liquid crystal display device 41 will be described below.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing symbols and a display surface 41a that are variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. FIG. FIG. 4A is an explanatory diagram showing a first liquid crystal design that is variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. The first liquid crystal symbol is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 and is a symbol corresponding to the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a.

  As shown to Fig.4 (a), the liquid crystal display device 41 carries out the variable display of the symbol which shows the numbers 1-8 as a 1st liquid crystal display symbol. In addition, you may employ | adopt the design by which symbols, such as a character, were attached | subjected to each symbol which shows the numbers 1-8 as a symbol which is variably displayed.

  FIG. 4B is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41 a of the liquid crystal display device 41. As shown in the drawing, a first liquid crystal symbol display area 41b, which is an area in which an image of the first liquid crystal symbol is displayed, is set on the display surface 41a. Further, on the display surface 41a, an area for displaying a second liquid crystal symbol which is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 and corresponding to the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b. The second liquid crystal symbol display area 41c is set.

  In the first liquid crystal symbol display area 41b, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of left, middle, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbols 1 to 8 are arranged as the first liquid crystal symbols shown in FIG. 4A in the ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol row has a periodicity. A variable display that scrolls from bottom to bottom or from bottom to top is performed. As shown in FIG. 4B, after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol is displayed on the effective line L for each symbol row. Specifically, when a game ball enters the center side first start port 33 or the right first start port 44, a variable display is started in which the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. The The symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . When the symbol change display ends and the display is stopped, if the result of the big win lottery by the main controller 60 is a big win, a predetermined combination of symbols is placed on the active line L. It is formed. For example, the same symbol combination is formed on the effective line L. In addition, the aspect of the 1st liquid crystal design in the 1st liquid crystal design display area 41b is not limited to the above-mentioned aspect. For example, there are various display modes of the first liquid crystal symbols such as the number of symbol rows in the first liquid crystal symbol display area 41b, the number of effective lines, the direction of symbol variation display in the symbol row, and the number of symbols in each symbol row. It is possible to adopt this aspect.

  On the other hand, when a game ball enters the second start port 34, the second liquid crystal symbol is displayed in the second liquid crystal symbol display area 41c. In the present embodiment, as the second liquid crystal pattern, a character image simulating an organism such as an octopus, a turtle, or a crab living in the sea is displayed in the second liquid crystal pattern display area 41c.

  In addition, the aspect of the 2nd liquid crystal design in the 2nd liquid crystal design display area 41c is not limited to the above-mentioned aspect. For example, as the second liquid crystal design, various forms of display of the second liquid crystal design such as a geometric figure such as a circle, a quadrangle, and a triangle, and a number can be adopted. Moreover, you may employ | adopt the aspect which does not display the design for 2nd liquid crystals. In this case, the second liquid crystal symbol display area 41c is not set on the display surface 41a.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4B, the first reserved display area Ds <b> 1 is displayed on the display surface 41 a of the liquid crystal display device 41. In the first hold display area Ds1, the number of holds based on the game balls entering the first start port 33 on the center side and the first start port 44 on the right side is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the number of game balls held in the central first start port 33 and the right first start port 44 is a maximum of four in total for the two first start ports. It is.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4 (b), the display surface 41a blinks and lights in synchronization with the first symbol change display and the stop display displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a of the special symbol unit 37. The first synchronous display section Sync1 that performs display, and the second synchronous display that performs blinking display and lighting display synchronized with the fluctuation display and stop display of the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display section 37b of the special symbol unit 37 Part Sync2. Specifically, when the first symbol display unit 37a is performing a variable display, the first synchronous display unit Sync1 is blinking and when the first symbol display unit 37a is displaying a stop, The 1-synchronization display section Sync1 is turned on. In addition, when the second symbol display unit 37b is performing a variable display, the second synchronization display unit Sync2 is blinking, and when the second symbol display unit 37b is performing a stop display, the second synchronization display is performed. The part Sync2 is turned on.

  In the present embodiment, the display surface 41a is configured to display the second liquid crystal symbol display area 41c, the first synchronous display portion Sync1, and the second synchronous display portion Sync2. A configuration may be adopted in which part or all of the display is not displayed.

A2. The electrical configuration of the gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

  FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly configured with the main control device 60 as a center, and includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 composed of elements having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when the program recorded in the ROM 63 is executed. In addition, the MPU 62 includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. Note that another element may have a part of the functions of the MPU 62. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

  The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the main control board 61, a payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85 are connected. The main control board 61 is supplied with power of DC stable 24V from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, converts external power supplied from the commercial power source into operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc. Supply power. In addition, on the input side of the main control board 61, various types such as a general winning port 32, a central first starting port 33, a right first starting port 44, a second starting port 34, a through gate 35b, and a variable winning device 36 are provided. Various detection sensors provided at the entrance and through gate are connected. Based on the signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not a game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each entrance, and the game ball passes through the through gate. It is determined whether or not Further, the MPU 62 performs a big win lottery based on the game balls entering the center first start port 33, the right first start port 44, and the second start port 34.

  On the output side of the main control board 61, a variable winning drive unit 36c that opens and closes the open / close door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric combination drive unit 44b that opens and closes the electric combination 44a of the right first start port 44. And the main display unit 45 are connected. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuit.

  Specifically, in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 36c so that the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed. Further, when the electrification opening is selected, as a result of the electrification opening lottery, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electrification accessory driving unit 44b so that the electrification accessory 44a is opened. In each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b in the main display unit 45, and in the opening / closing execution mode, the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45. Execute display control.

  Further, a payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the main control board 61. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the payout control device 70 based on the result of entering the ball. When the main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63 f of the ROM 63. Specifically, when a game ball is entered into the general prize opening 32, a prize ball command corresponding to payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the first start port (center When the game ball is entered into the first side start port 33 and the first right side start port 44), a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, 2 When the entry of a game ball into the start port 34 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of one game ball is transmitted from the main controller 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60 to pay out the prize ball.

  A discharge control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70. The launch control device 80 performs launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball launching mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met. An operation handle 25 is connected to the launch control device 80. As described above, the operation handle 25 includes the touch sensor 25a, the weight button 25b, and the variable resistor 25c. When the player holds the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the rotation operation amount. A game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. Further, a game ball launch button 26 is connected to the launch control device 80. When the game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is fired onto the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on.

  The sound emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main control device 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands will be described later.

  In addition, the sound emission control device 90 controls driving of various lamps 47 including light emitting means such as LEDs disposed on the front door frame 14 and driving control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. And the display control device 100 is controlled. In addition, an effect operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by a player at a predetermined timing, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed. Various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control apparatus 100, etc. are controlled.

  The display control device 100 executes display control of the liquid crystal display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps the variation time of symbols on the liquid crystal display device 41 and the type of symbol combination to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90. The presence / absence of reach, the contents of the reach effect, and the contents of the effect executed while the first symbol and the second symbol are variably displayed. In the present embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the first symbol or the second symbol is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the variation time, the unit game time which is the time required for one game time is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for jackpot lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery, a display setting of the main display unit 45, a symbol display setting of the liquid crystal display device 41, and the like. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery. A jackpot type counter C2 is used to sort jackpot types such as probability variation jackpots and normal jackpots. A reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not to generate reach when the symbol sequence displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 is shifted and changed.

  A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. In addition, the variation type counter CS is used when determining the variation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b of the main display unit 45 and the liquid crystal display device 41. Furthermore, the electric accessory release counter C4 is used for the electric accessory release lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric accessory 44a of the right first start port 44.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value every time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

  The RAM 64 is provided with a hold information storage area 64b and a determination process execution area 64c. The holding information storage area 64b is provided with a first holding area Ra. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the central first start port 33 or the right first start port 44, the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of the incoming ball are The information is stored in time series in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b. When a game ball enters the second start port 34, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of the ball are stored in the determination processing execution area 64c.

  Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery as described above. For example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to increment one by one within a range of 0 to 599 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599).

  The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and when the game ball enters the first starting port (the central first starting port 33 or the right first starting port 44), It is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing, and when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the determination processing execution area 64c at the timing of the entering. When a game ball enters the first starting port (the first first starting port 33 or the right first starting port 44), the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra is determined. After moving to the execution area 64c, when a game ball enters the second start port 34, the value of the big hit random number counter C1 is stored in the determination processing execution area 64c and then stored in the success / failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. It is checked against the hit / failed table, and it is determined whether or not it is a big hit.

  Next, details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining jackpot types such as probability variation jackpots and normal jackpots. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to increment one by one within the range of 0 to 29 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is obtained when a game ball enters the first start port (the first start port 33 on the center side or the first start port 44 on the right side). It is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing, and when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the determination processing execution area 64c at the timing of the entering.

  As described above, the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c, and when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the determination process execution area 64c The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the table. Further, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b. . In the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

  Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the jackpot lottery is not a jackpot. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is the hold information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port (the first start port 33 on the center side or the first start port 44 on the right side). Is stored in the first holding area Ra, and is stored in the determination processing execution area 64c at the timing when the game ball enters the second start port 34. When a game ball enters the first start port (the first first start port 33 or the right first start port 44), the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra is determined. When a game ball enters the second start port 34 after moving to the execution area 64c, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the determination process execution area 64c, and then the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 is stored. Is compared with the reach determination table stored in the table, and it is determined whether or not reach occurs. However, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot and the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the reach occurrence regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

  Reach means that for some of the symbol sequences displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 41, a combination of symbols for which a symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot may be established is stopped. This is a display state in which the symbols are displayed in the state of the remaining symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot means a combination of the same symbols on a predetermined effective line. Specifically, on the display surface 41a of FIG. 4B, the symbols are first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbols as Z1 are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3, thereby forming a reach line. In the situation where the reach line is formed, the symbol row Z2 is subjected to the variable display of the symbol, thereby reaching a reach. When a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

  In addition, in the reach, in the state that the reach line is formed, while performing the variable display of the symbols in the remaining symbol row, and performing a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen, A combination of performing a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after reducing or not displaying a combination of symbols on which a reach line is formed. In addition, when the reach effect is being performed, or prior to the reach display, it is determined whether or not the notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is performed using the reach random number counter C3 or other counters. May be.

  Next, details of the variation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b and the variation time of the symbol in the liquid crystal display device 41. For example, the variation type counter CS is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and after reaching the maximum value, the variation type counter CS returns to zero.

  The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of variation display in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b and when the variation of the symbol is started by the liquid crystal display device 41. In determining the variation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b, a variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used.

  The combination of the acquired value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 and the value of the reach random number counter C3 corresponds to the special information in the present invention. A combination of a value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 and the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first hold area Ra is also referred to as hold information.

  Next, details of the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to be incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 249 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric utility reservation area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35b. Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 stored in the electric utility reservation area 64d moves to the electric accessory execution area 64e, the electric accessory release in the electric accessory execution area 64e is performed. Using the value of the counter C4, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 44a to the open state. For example, if C4 = 0 to 199, the electric accessory 44a is controlled to be in an open state, and if C4 = 200 to 249, the electric accessory 44a is maintained in a closed state.

  Next, the success / failure table will be described. The success / failure table is table data for collating with the jackpot random number counter C1 when the jackpot lottery is performed based on the jackpot random number counter C1. In the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode and a high probability mode are set as the lottery mode of the big hit lottery. When the big hit lottery in the low probability mode, the success / failure table for the low probability mode is referred to. In the case of jackpot lottery in the probability mode, the success / failure table for the high probability mode is referred to. In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the central first starting port 33 or the right first starting port 44. And a success / failure table for collating with the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c at the timing when the game ball enters the second start port 34. Are stored as separate table data. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first start / failure table (low probability mode), a first start / fail table (high probability mode), and a second start / fail table (low probability mode). The four success / failure tables for the probability mode and the second start opening / failure table (for the high probability mode) are stored in the success / failure table storage area 63 a of the ROM 63.

  FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the first start / failure table. FIG. 7A shows a first start port success / failure table (low probability mode), and FIG. 7B shows a first start port success table (high probability mode).

  As shown in FIG. 7 (a), in the first start port success / failure table (for the low probability mode), there are two (for example, “7”, “341”) as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is a jackpot. Value is set. And values other than these values are out of the values of 0 to 599. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7 (b), in the first start port success / failure table (for high probability mode), there are 8 (for example, “7”, “ 39 ”,“ 198 ”,“ 253 ”,“ 341 ”,“ 411 ”,“ 497 ”,“ 576 ”) are set. And values other than these values are out of the values of 0 to 599. In this way, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery than the low probability mode.

  Further, in this embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the low probability mode hit / fail table is the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the high probability mode hit / fail table. Included in the group. However, as a result of the jackpot lottery, if the probability that the high probability mode is a big hit is higher than that of the low probability mode, the number and value of random numbers set as the jackpot are arbitrary.

  FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the success / failure table for the second start port. FIG. 8A shows a second start port success / failure table (low probability mode), and FIG. 8B shows a second start port success table (high probability mode). As shown in FIG. 8 (a), two values are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, which is a jackpot, in the second start opening success / failure table (for the low probability mode), and the jackpot serving as the jackpot 550 values are set as the value of the random number C1. And values other than these values are out of the values of 0 to 599.

  Here, the “small winning” is a trigger result for the transition to the opening / closing execution mode in which the opening / closing of the variable winning device 36 is performed, but is a result of success / failure that does not trigger the transition in both the lottery mode and the support mode to be described later. is there. On the other hand, “displacement” is a result of success / failure that does not trigger the transition to the opening / closing execution mode and does not trigger the transition for the lottery mode and the support mode.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8B, eight values are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, which is a big hit, in the second start opening / failing table (for the high probability mode). 550 values are set as the value of the jackpot random number C1. And values other than these values are out of the values of 0 to 599. As described above, in the success / failure table for the second start port, similarly to the success / failure table for the first start port, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery than the low probability mode. ing. Furthermore, in the success / failure table for the second start port, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is a small hit is set to 550 in both the low-probability success table and the high-probability success / failure table. 2. When a big win lottery is executed in response to a game ball having entered the start opening, it is set to be a small hit with a high probability.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set for the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, a plurality of types of jackpots can be set by providing a difference in the following three modes or modes.
(1) Number of times (number of rounds) of opening / closing door 36b of variable winning device 36 in opening / closing execution mode
(2) Aspects of opening / closing control of variable winning device 36 in opening / closing execution mode (3) Lottery mode (low probability mode or high probability mode) of jackpot lottery after opening / closing execution mode ends

  As an aspect of the opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above-described (2) opening / closing execution mode, occurrence of a game ball (winning) in the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode The high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequency is relatively high or low. In the present embodiment, in the high-frequency winning mode, one opening of the opening / closing door 36b in the opening / closing execution mode is continued until 30 seconds elapse or until the number of game balls entering the opening / closing door 36b reaches 10. Is set as follows. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, one opening of the opening / closing door 36b in the opening / closing execution mode is set to continue until 0.2 seconds elapses or the number of balls entered into the opening / closing door 36b is six. .

  When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 81 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds. In the low-frequency winning mode of the present embodiment, the opening time of one open / close door 36b is 0.2 seconds. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the open / close door 36b is shorter than the game ball firing cycle. Therefore, in the opening / closing execution mode according to the low frequency winning mode, the winning of the game ball does not substantially occur. However, even in the opening / closing execution mode according to the low-frequency winning mode, it may be set so that the winning of the game ball can occur.

  Note that the opening limit time for one opening of the opening / closing door 36b and the opening limit number for one opening are the occurrence of entering the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode. If the frequency is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the open / close door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, the high-frequency winning mode may be set longer than the low-frequency winning mode, or the opening limit number for one opening may be set longer. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the configuration may be such that the variable winning device 36 is not substantially won in the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot lottery results in a jackpot, the jackpot type is distributed using the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a sorting table in the sorting table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

  FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 9A shows a distribution table for the first start port, and FIG. 9B shows a distribution table for the second start port. The distribution table for the first start port is referred to in the big hit lottery based on the game ball entering the center first start port 33 or the right first start port 44, and the second start port distribution table. The table is referred to in the case of the big hit lottery based on the game ball entering the second start port 34.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, the distribution table for the first start port includes 16R as a jackpot type based on a game ball entering the center first start port 33 or the right first start port 44. Probable jackpot, 8R probability jackpot and 8R normal jackpot are set.

  In the 16R probability variation jackpot, the open / close door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is opened and closed 16 times (16 rounds), and the open / close control mode of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode. The jackpot lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends is a jackpot that becomes a high probability mode.

  In the 8R probability variation jackpot, the open / close door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is opened and closed 8 times (8 rounds), and the open / close control mode of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode. The jackpot lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends is a jackpot that becomes a high probability mode.

  In the 8R normal jackpot, the open / close door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is opened and closed 8 times (8 rounds), and the open / close control mode of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode. The jackpot lottery mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is a jackpot that becomes the low probability mode.

  In the distribution table for the first start opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 11” corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and “12 to 19” corresponds to the 8R probability variation jackpot. However, “20 to 29” is set to correspond to the 8R normal jackpot.

  As shown in FIG. 9B, the 2R normal jackpot is set in the sorting table for the second starter as a jackpot type based on the game ball entering the second starter 34.

  In the 2R normal jackpot, the open / close door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is opened and closed twice (two rounds), and the open / close control mode of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the low frequency winning mode. The jackpot lottery mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is a jackpot that becomes the low probability mode.

  In the distribution table for the second start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, all the values of “0 to 29” are set to correspond to the 2R normal jackpot.

  Note that the open / close execution mode to be shifted when the result of the big win lottery is a small win is that the open / close door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened and closed once (one round), and the open / close door 36b is opened once. Is set to continue until 1.8 seconds elapse or until the number of balls entering the door 36b reaches six. And the lottery mode of the jackpot lottery after the opening / closing execution mode ends is not changed and the lottery mode is maintained as it is.

  Further, when the result of the big hit lottery is out of the range, the mode does not shift to the opening / closing execution mode, and the lottery mode is not changed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the distribution mode of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot is based on the game ball entering the center-side first start port 33 or the right first start port 44. And a big win based on the game ball entering the second start port 34, and there is a clear difference in the advantage for the player .

A3. Overview of processing by gaming machines:
Next, an outline of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 10 is a time chart for explaining an example (Example 1) of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment. The process shown from time Tm1 to time Tm4 shown in FIG. 10 is a process executed by the pachinko machine 10 when a game ball enters the first starting port (in this example, the first first starting port 33). Show. In the process shown from time Tm5 to time Tm12, after the game ball enters the first start port (center side first start port 33), the player operates the game ball launch button 26 at a predetermined timing, A process executed by the pachinko machine 10 when a game ball enters the second start port 34 is shown.

  When the player starts the operation (rotation operation) of the operation handle 25 at time Tm1, the game ball is launched into the game area PA by the game ball launching mechanism 81. In this example, it is assumed that the player is operating by adjusting the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 25 so that the game ball enters the first start port 33 on the center side.

  Then, when a game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 and flowing down the game area PA enters the first start port, the detection sensor for the first start port detects the entrance of the game ball at time Tm2. In this example, a game ball enters the central first start port 33.

  When a game ball enters the center-side first starting port 33, the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are acquired, and at the time Tm3, the first symbol display unit 37a displays the first symbol display part 37a. Start the variable display of the symbol. The first symbol display unit 37a displays the first symbol in a suspended manner after the first symbol is variably displayed from time Tm3 to time Tm4, that is, during the variation time tc1. The variation time tc1 (from time Tm3 to time Tm4), which is the time for the first symbol to display the variation, is preset based on the variation type counter CS acquired before the first symbol display unit 37a starts the variation display. Time. It is assumed that the result of the jackpot lottery executed based on the jackpot random number counter C1 acquired when the game ball enters the first start opening this time is “off”.

  The pachinko machine 10 executes an effect for the first symbol prepared for detachment as an effect from the time Tm3 to the time Tm4 when the first symbol display unit 37a displays the variation of the first symbol. Specifically, an effect that combines display of an image on the liquid crystal display device 41, output of sound from the speaker 46, driving of a movable accessory, and the like is executed. Then, at the end of the first symbol effect for detachment, the first symbol is stopped and displayed with a combination of symbols corresponding to the detachment.

  Next, processing from time Tm5 to time Tm12 will be described. Note that it is assumed that the player is operating by adjusting the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 25 so that the game ball is inserted into the central first starting port 33 continuously from the time Tm1.

  When a game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 and flowing down the game area PA by operating the operation handle 25 enters the central first start port 33 at time Tm5, the player uses the first start port. A detection sensor detects an incoming game ball. When a game ball enters the center-side first starting port 33, values of the big hit random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are acquired, and at time Tm6, the first symbol display unit 37a displays the first symbol display part 37a. Start the variable display of the symbol. In this example as well, it is assumed that the result of the jackpot lottery executed based on the jackpot random number counter C1 acquired when the game ball enters the first starting port is a failure. Therefore, at the same time as the first symbol variation display is started, the pachinko machine 10 starts the first symbol effect for detachment.

  The player recognizes that the first symbol variation display and the first symbol effect for release have started, and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the game times related to the effect is low. Recognize that, and hope to reduce the number of game times being executed. Then, when the player operates the game ball launch button 26 at time Tm7 for the purpose of shortening the game times being executed, the game area PA is set from the game ball launch mechanism 81 on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. A game ball is fired. When the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the launch control device 80 adjusts the launch intensity of the game ball in the game ball launch mechanism 81 so that the probability of entering the second start port 34 is increased, A game ball is launched into the game area PA. In the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 3, when the operation handle 25 is rotated by the player so that the shooting strength of the game ball becomes the maximum strength, or the player releases the game ball. When the button 26 is operated, the second start port 34 is arranged at a position on the game area PA where the game ball launched by the game ball launching mechanism 81 enters. That is, the game ball launch button 26 enables the player to intentionally prompt the establishment of the condition that the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

  When a game ball launched into the game area PA by the player operating the game ball launch button 26 at time Tm7 enters the second start port 34, the detection sensor for the second start port is played at time Tm8. Detects the entry of a sphere. When a game ball enters the second start port 34, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are acquired, and at time Tm9, the second symbol display unit 37b displays the second symbol. Start displaying fluctuations.

  The second symbol display unit 37b displays the second symbol in a stopped manner after the second symbol is variably displayed from the time Tm9 to the time Tm10, that is, during the variation time tc4. The variation time tc4 (from time Tm9 to time Tm10), which is the time during which the second symbol is variably displayed, is set in advance based on the variation type counter CS acquired before the second symbol display unit 37b starts the variation display. Time. It is assumed that the result of the jackpot lottery executed based on the jackpot random number counter C1 acquired at the time of entering the second starting port this time is “small hit”. In the present embodiment, the variation time of the second symbol when the result of the big hit lottery executed based on the entrance to the second start port 34 is “small win” is set to 1 second. Yes. That is, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time tc4 is 1 second.

  The second symbol display unit 37b stops the variable symbol display of the second symbol after the lapse of the variation time tc4 since the second symbol display unit 37b starts the variable symbol display, that is, at time Tm10.

  At this time, the first symbol of the first symbol display unit 37a that has been displayed in a variable manner is the second symbol of the second symbol display unit 37b, even though the originally set variation time tc2 has not elapsed. At the timing (time Tm10) at which the symbol stops display, the display shifts from the variable display to the stop display. As a result, the first symbol of the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol of the second symbol display unit 37b are displayed to be stopped almost simultaneously. Then, at time Tm11, the variable winning device is opened once, triggered by the fact that the lottery result of the big hit lottery based on the ball entering the second start port 34 is a small hit. In this case, the time for which the variable winning device is opened is 0.2 seconds.

  The above process will be specifically described. The variation time tc2, which is the time during which the first symbol of the first symbol display unit 37a performs variation display, is preliminarily based on the variation type counter CS acquired before the first symbol display unit 37a starts variation display. Is set. Accordingly, normally, the first symbol display unit 37a displays the first symbol variably when triggered by the entry of a game ball into the center-side first starting port 33, and the time for variably displaying the first symbol. When the variation time tc2 preset as the variation time is elapsed, the first symbol is stopped and displayed.

  However, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the first symbol and the second symbol are displayed in a variable manner, and the first symbol combination that the first symbol display unit 37a stops and displays is a big hit. When the combination is a combination corresponding to “losing” in the lottery and the combination of the second symbols to be stopped and displayed by the second symbol display unit 37 b is a combination corresponding to “small winning” or “big winning” in the big winning lottery Displays the first symbol when the second symbol is stopped. In other words, based on the combination of the first symbol that the first symbol display unit 37a stops and the second symbol combination that the second symbol display unit 37b stops and displays, the variation time of the first symbol is calculated. The time is shortened to a time shorter than the preset fluctuation time (the fluctuation time tc2 in this example) (the fluctuation time tc3 in this example).

  In the present embodiment, after the first symbol starts the variable display, the second symbol starts the variable display, and the combination of the first symbols to be stopped and operated causes the variable winning device 36 to operate. When the combination of the second symbols to be stopped and displayed is not the symbol combination but the symbol combination for operating the variable winning device 36, the variation time of the first symbol is shorter than the preset variation time. To shorten.

  In the present embodiment, the first symbol combination for operating the variable prize winning device 36 is a symbol combination corresponding to “big win” in the big win lottery. Further, the second symbol combination for operating the variable winning device 36 is a symbol combination corresponding to “big hit” or “small bonus” in the big win lottery.

  In the example shown in FIG. 10, the first symbol display unit 37 a is stopped and displayed with a symbol combination corresponding to “deletion”, which is a symbol combination that does not operate the variable winning device 36, and the second symbol display The unit 37b stops and displays the combination of symbols corresponding to the “small hit” which is the combination of symbols for operating the variable winning device 36, so the pachinko machine 10 determines the variation time of the first symbol from the variation time tc2. When the time is shortened to the fluctuation time tc3 and the second symbol is stopped and displayed, the first symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 10, the player intentionally causes the game ball to enter the second start port 34 by operating the game ball launch button 26 while the first symbol is displayed in a variable manner. 2 symbols are variably displayed. When the first symbol to be stopped is “displaced” and the second symbol is “big hit” or “small hit”, the first symbol is displayed when the second symbol is stopped and displayed. Will also stop display. In other words, the game ball launch button 26 is a process for shortening the variation time of the first symbol to a time shorter than the preset variation time when the player operates while the first symbol is variably displayed. Allows the player to intentionally prompt. The game ball can be inserted into the second starting port 34 by the player turning the operation handle 25 to fire the game ball into the game area PA. It is made possible by manipulating 26 easily. That is, the game ball launch button 26 plays a role of assisting the player in the operation of firing the game ball.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 displays a variation when the first symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the first symbol has a variation time shorter than a preset variation time. A “skip effect” is performed that suggests that the first symbol being stopped is displayed. Specifically, at the time point Tm9, the execution of the first symbol effect that was set to be executed at the fluctuation time tc2 from the time Tm6 to the time Tm12 at the time when the first symbol starts the fluctuation display. At the same time, the skip effect is executed from time Tm9 to time Tm10 when the first symbol and the second symbol stop display, that is, during the second symbol variation time tc4. The skip effect is an effect that suggests that the first symbol that is variably displayed is stopped and displayed while the first symbol variation display or the first symbol effect is omitted or omitted (skip).

  FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a skip effect. FIG. 11A shows an example of an image displayed on the display surface 41a when the skip effect is executed. In the skip production in the present embodiment, the female character omits or omits (skips) the first symbol variation display or the first symbol variation display, and stops the first symbol that is variably displayed. It is a production that suggests.

  After executing the skip effect, the pachinko machine 10 stops and displays the first symbol and the second symbol on the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b, respectively, at the time Tm10. On 41a, the liquid crystal symbol which is an image corresponding to the first symbol and the second symbol which are stopped and displayed is displayed.

  FIG. 12 is a time chart for explaining an example (example 2) of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment. In this example, an example will be described in which the pachinko machine 10 does not shorten the variation time of the first symbol to a time shorter than a preset variation time.

  When the player starts operating the operation handle 25 at time Tm1, the game ball is launched into the game area PA by the game ball launch mechanism 81. In this example, the player operates by adjusting the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 25 so that the game ball enters the first start port 33 on the center side.

  Then, when a game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 and flowing down the game area PA enters the first start port, the detection sensor for the first start port detects the entrance of the game ball at time Tm2. In this example, a game ball enters the central first start port 33.

  When a game ball enters the center-side first starting port 33, the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are acquired, and at the time Tm3, the first symbol display unit 37a displays the first symbol display part 37a. Start the variable display of the symbol. In this example, it is assumed that the result of the jackpot lottery executed based on the jackpot random number counter C1 acquired when the game ball enters the first start port is “jackpot”.

  When the first symbol display unit 37a starts the variable display of the first symbol, the pachinko machine 10 executes the first symbol effect prepared for jackpot as an effect. Specifically, an effect that combines display of an image on the liquid crystal display device 41, output of sound from the speaker 46, driving of a movable accessory, and the like is executed.

  When a player who recognizes that the first symbol variation display and the first symbol effect have been started operates the game ball launch button 26 at time Tm4, the game is performed on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. A game ball is launched from the ball launch mechanism 81 to the game area PA. As described above, when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the launch control device 80 determines the launch intensity of the game ball in the game ball launch mechanism 81 and the probability that the game ball enters the second start port 34. Is adjusted to be higher, and a game ball is launched into the game area PA.

  When the game ball launched into the game area PA by the player operating the game ball launch button 26 at time Tm4 enters the second start port 34, the detection sensor for the second start port is played at time Tm5. Detects the entry of a sphere. When a game ball enters the second start port 34, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are acquired, and at time Tm6, the second symbol display unit 37b displays the second symbol. Start displaying fluctuations.

  The second symbol display unit 37b displays the second symbol in a stopped manner after the second symbol is variably displayed from time Tm6 to time Tm7, that is, during the fluctuation time tc2. The fluctuation time tc2 (from time Tm6 to time Tm7), which is the time during which the second symbol displays the fluctuation, is preliminarily determined based on the fluctuation type counter CS acquired before the second symbol display unit 37b starts the fluctuation display. It is a set time. It is assumed that the result of the jackpot lottery executed based on the jackpot random number counter C1 acquired in response to the current entry to the second starting port is “out”. In the present embodiment, the variation time of the second symbol when the result of the jackpot lottery executed based on the entrance to the second starting port 34 is “out” is set to 1 second. . That is, in this embodiment, the fluctuation time tc2 is 1 second.

  The second symbol display unit 37b stops the variable symbol display of the second symbol after the lapse of the variable time tc2 since the second symbol display unit 37b starts the variable symbol display, that is, at time Tm7. That is, the 2nd symbol display part 37b carries out the stop display of the 2nd symbol.

  At this time, in the example shown in FIG. 11 (example 1), the first symbol of the first symbol display unit 37a that has been variably displayed is the second symbol of the second symbol display unit 37b that is stopped. In this example (example 2), the first symbol display unit 37a performing the variable display stops the second symbol of the second symbol display unit 37b. Even at the display timing, the variable display is continued without shifting to the stop display. That is, the variation time of the first symbol is not shortened to a time shorter than a preset variation time.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 performs the skip impossible effect during the time Tm7 when the second symbol display unit 37b starts the variable display and the time Tm7 where the stop display is performed, that is, during the variable time tc2. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a second start port after the game ball has entered the center side first start port 33 (or the right first start port 44) and the first symbol has started to change display. In the case where the game ball enters the ball 34 and the second symbol starts to change, and when the process of reducing the variation time of the first symbol to a time shorter than the preset variation time is not executed. , Executing a performance that cannot be skipped.

  FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of effects performed by the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 13A shows an example of an effect that cannot be skipped. FIG. 13A shows a display surface 41a that displays an effect that cannot be skipped. The non-skippable effect in the present embodiment is an effect that suggests that the female character cannot omit or omit (skip) the first symbol variation display or the first symbol effect. In other words, the non-skippable effect is an effect that suggests that the first symbol does not stop and display when the game ball enters the second start port 34. As shown in FIG. 12, in the present embodiment, the non-skippable effect is inserted during execution of the first symbol effect for jackpot triggered by entering the center side first start opening 33 ( It is executed as a so-called cut-in effect). That is, on the display surface 41a, an image of the effect that cannot be skipped is displayed so as to be superimposed on the image of the first symbol effect for jackpot.

  A player who recognizes that the first symbol is not stopped and displayed even though the game ball has entered the second start opening 34 operates the game ball launch button 26 again at time Tm8, thereby playing the game. Even when a game ball launched into the area PA enters the second start port 34, at time Tm9, the detection sensor for the second start port detects the entrance of the game ball, and from time Tm10 to time Tm11. The first symbol display unit 37a performing the variable symbol display and the non-skipable effect of the second symbol and performing the variable symbol display is also performed at the timing when the second symbol of the second symbol display unit 37b performs the stop display. Continues the variable display without shifting to the stop display. That is, the variation time reduction process is not executed.

  Thereafter, at time Tm12, when the player operates the game ball launch button 26 again, and the game ball launched into the game area PA enters the second start port 34, at time Tm13, the second A detection sensor for the start port detects the entry of a game ball. Then, from time Tm14 to time Tm15, the variation display of the second symbol is executed and the jackpot notification effect is executed.

  The jackpot announcement effect is a case where the result of the jackpot lottery executed when the game ball enters the first starting port (the first first starting port 33 or the right first starting port 44) is a big hit. This is executed when the remaining time of the variation time of the first symbol is equal to or shorter than a predetermined time.

  More specifically, when the result of the jackpot lottery executed based on the game ball entering the first starting port (the central first starting port 33 or the right first starting port 44) is “big hit” Then, after the first symbol starts changing display by the game ball entering the first start opening, the game ball enters the second start opening 34 and the second symbol starts changing display. In this case, when the process of reducing the variation time of the first symbol to a time shorter than the variation time set in advance is not executed, the skip impossible effect or the jackpot notification effect is executed. Whether to execute the non-skippable effect or the jackpot notification effect is selected and determined according to the remaining time of the variation time of the first symbol. In this embodiment, when the remaining time of the variation time of the first symbol is longer than 5 seconds at the time of executing the non-skippable effect or the jackpot announcement effect, the non-skippable effect is executed and the first symbol When the remaining time of the fluctuation time is 5 seconds or less, the jackpot notification effect is executed.

  The jackpot announcement effect is based on the display of the image for notifying that the jackpot is on the display surface 41a, the lighting of various lamps 47 provided in the pachinko machine 10, and the output of sound from the speaker 46, so that the first start port (center side) This is an effect of notifying the player that the result of the jackpot lottery based on the game ball entering the first start port 33 or the right first start port 44) is a “hit”.

  FIG. 13B is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a jackpot notification effect. FIG. 13B shows a display surface 41a for displaying the jackpot notification effect. The jackpot notification effect in the present embodiment is an effect in which the female character notifies that the result of the jackpot lottery is “hit”. By executing the jackpot effect, the player recognizes that the result of the jackpot lottery based on the entrance of the game ball into the first start opening is “hit” and puts the game ball into the second start opening 34. Recognizing that the result of the jackpot lottery based on the game balls entering the first starting port was “big hit” that the first symbol did not stop even though the ball was entered To do.

  After the jackpot announcement effect is executed, the first symbol of the combination indicating that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is “jackpot” is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a. In addition, a combination of liquid crystal symbols corresponding to the first symbol stopped and displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a is displayed on the effective lines L of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the display surface 41a.

  Thereafter, a special game state effect consisting of an opening effect, a round effect, and an ending effect is executed, and from time Tm17 to time Tm18, a transition is made to an opening / closing execution mode in which the variable winning device is opened and closed.

  The outline of the processing by the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment has been described above.

A4. Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific processing executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. First, processing executed in the main control device 60 will be described, and then processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

  The MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. The MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing that is activated by the input of a power failure signal in addition to the timer interrupt processing and normal processing, but description of these processing is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is started periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60.

  In step S101, various detection sensor reading processes are executed. Specifically, the states of various detection sensors connected to the main controller 60 are read, the states of the sensors are determined, and the detection information (entrance detection information) is stored. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S102.

  In step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S103.

  In step S103, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3, and when each counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to zero. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S104.

  In step S104, a ball entering process for the start port accompanying the entrance of game balls into the first start port (center side first start port 33, right side first start port 44) and second start port 34 is executed. The details of the entrance processing for the start port in step S104 will be described later. After executing step S104, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt process.

<Pick-up processing for starter>
Next, the ball entering process for the start port will be described. The starting ball entry process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 14: S104).

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a ball entry process for the start port. In step S201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (start winning prize) at the first start port (center side first start port 33 or right side first start port 44). The determination is made based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to one start port 44. If it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has entered the first start port (the first start port 33 on the center side or the first start port 44 on the right side) (S201: YES), the process proceeds to step S202 and payout control is performed. A prize ball command for causing the device 70 to pay out three game balls is set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S203.

  In step S203, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal indicating that a game ball has entered the central first start port 33 or the right first start port 44 to the management control device on the game hall side. Do. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S204.

  In step S204, it is determined whether or not the first start suspension number RaN is less than an upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). In step S204, if the first start reservation number RaN is not less than the upper limit value (S204: NO), the starting process for the start opening is terminated. As described above, in the present embodiment, a maximum of four game balls that have entered the center-side first start port 33 or the right first start port 44 are reserved as a total of the two first start ports. The

  On the other hand, if the first start hold number RaN is less than the upper limit value in step S204 (S204: YES), the process proceeds to step S205, and 1 is added to the first start hold number RaN of the corresponding holding area. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S206.

  In step S206, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 (FIG. 14) are used as the first storage area among the free storage areas of the corresponding reserved area, ie, step In S205, the value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first start reserved number RaN added with 1. After executing Step S206, the process proceeds to Step S207.

  In step S207, a destination determination process is executed. The pre-judgment process is based on information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3, whether or not the jackpot lottery determination result (lottery result), the jackpot type, and the occurrence of reach This is a process of determining whether or not there is a hold before the hold information becomes a target of a big win lottery (determination process) by the main control device 60. Details of the destination determination process will be described later. After executing Step S207, the process proceeds to Step S208.

  In step S208, processing for setting a hold command is executed. Specifically, the determination result of the destination determination process executed based on the information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is set as a hold command.

  The hold command is based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first start port (the first start port 33 on the center side or the first start port 44 on the right side) and the hold information obtained based on the input. This is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize the determination result by the determination process before the hold information becomes the target of the big hit lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in a command output process (FIG. 17: step S402) of a normal process described later.

  When the sound emission control device 90 receives a hold command transmitted based on the game ball entering the first start port (the first start port 33 on the central side or the first start port 44 on the right side), Then, a command for changing the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the liquid crystal display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of hold is transmitted to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the liquid crystal display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the hold number.

  If it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has not entered the first start port (the first start port 33 on the center side, the first start port 44 on the right side) (S201: NO), the process proceeds to step S209. Whether or not the game ball has entered the second start port 34 is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second start port 34.

  If it is determined in step S209 that a game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (S209: YES), the process proceeds to step S210, and a prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out one game ball. Set the command. Then, it progresses to step S211. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S209 that the game ball has not entered the second start opening 34 (S209: NO), the start opening entry process is terminated.

  In step S211, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal indicating that a game ball has entered the second start port 34 to the management control device on the game hall side. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S212.

  In step S212, it is determined whether the open / close execution mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The opening / closing execution mode flag is a flag that is turned on when the gaming state is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode in the gaming state transition process described later, and is turned off when the opening / closing execution mode is ended in the gaming state transition process. If it is determined in step S212 that the opening / closing execution mode flag is not ON (step S212: NO), the process proceeds to step S213. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S212 that the opening / closing execution mode flag is ON (step S212: YES), the starting process for the start opening is terminated.

  In step S213, it is determined whether or not the second changing flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The second changing flag is turned on when the second symbol of the second symbol display unit 37b starts to change when the game ball enters the second starting port 34, and the second symbol changes. It is a flag that is turned off when stopping.

  If it is determined in step S213 that the second changing flag is not ON (step S213: NO), the process proceeds to step S214. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S213 that the second changing flag is ON (step S213: YES), the starting process for the starting port is terminated.

  In Step S214, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in Step S103 (FIG. 14) are stored in the second execution area of the determination process execution area 64c. After executing Step S214, the process proceeds to Step S215.

  In step S215, the second start entrance ball flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. The second starting port entrance flag is turned on when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, and is turned off when the second symbol starts changing when the second starting port 34 enters. To be. After step S215 is executed, the ball entry process for the start port is terminated.

<Determination processing>
Next, the destination determination process will be described. The pre-determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine for the entrance process for the start opening (FIG. 15: S207).

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the destination determination process. As described above, the pre-determination process is based on the hold information, and the determination results such as whether or not the jackpot lottery is determined, whether the jackpot type is determined, whether or not the reach has occurred, This process is executed before the lottery target.

  In step S301, the game area is stored in the storage area by entering the game ball into the first start port (the first start port 33 on the center side or the first start port 44 on the right side) in the ball entry process for the start port (FIG. 15). The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is read. After that, the process proceeds to step S302, and the lottery mode at the time when the big hit lottery by entering this game ball is executed as the game time is determined. Specifically, the determination result of the previous determination process executed by entering the game ball prior to the current game ball is read from the corresponding storage area, and from the jackpot lottery by the current game ball entering The lottery mode at the time when the jackpot lottery by entering this game ball is executed as a game time is determined by grasping whether or not there is a probability change jackpot that occurs before.

  In step S302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is the low probability mode at the time when the jackpot lottery by entering this game ball is executed as a game time (S302: YES), the process proceeds to step S303. Reference is made to the first start port success / failure table (for low probability mode) stored in the success / failure table storage area 63a. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S305, where it is determined whether or not the value information of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot as a result of referring to the first start / failure table (for the low probability mode). .

  On the other hand, in step S302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode at the time when the big hit lottery by entering this game ball is executed as a game round (S302: NO), the process proceeds to step S304. It is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot as a result of referring to the first start opening / failure table (for high probability mode). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S305, where it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot as a result of referring to the first start / failure table (for high probability mode).

  In step S305, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot (S305: YES), the process proceeds to step S306, and is stored by entering the game ball at the current start port. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the area is read. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S307, and the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b is referred to. After executing Step S307, the process proceeds to Step S308.

  In step S308, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 read this time corresponds to the probability variation jackpot. If it is determined in step S308 that the probability variation jackpot is supported (S308: YES), the process proceeds to step S309, and the probability variation jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. Thereafter, the destination determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S308 that the probability variation jackpot is not supported (S308: NO), the process proceeds to step S310, and the normal jackpot information is stored in the first determination processing result storage area 64h. Thereafter, the destination determination process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S305 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time does not correspond to the jackpot (S305: NO), the process proceeds to step S311 and the game ball enters the starting port this time. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the storage area is read. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S312, and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S313, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

  If it is determined in step S313 that it corresponds to the occurrence of reach (S313: YES), the process proceeds to step S314, and the reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination process result storage area 64h. Thereafter, the destination determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S313 that it does not correspond to the occurrence of reach (S313: NO), the previous determination process is terminated.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be described. The normal process is a process started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power is turned on. In the normal process, the main process of the game is executed.

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step S401, a startup process is executed. Specifically, initial setting of each control device upon power-on, determination of the validity of data stored in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S402.

  In step S402, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the normal process executed last time is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. Further, when commands related to effects such as a change command, a type command, and a hold command are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. After executing Step S402, the process proceeds to Step S403.

  In step S403, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S404.

  In step S404, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step S405. In step S405, a game times control process for controlling a game in each game time is executed. In the game times control process, jackpot lottery, setting of symbol variation display by the liquid crystal display device 41, display control of the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b, and the like are performed. Details of the game times control process will be described later. After executing Step S405, the process proceeds to Step S406.

  In step S406, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. By executing the gaming state transition process, the gaming state transitions to an opening / closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like. Details of the game state transition processing will be described later. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S407.

  In step S <b> 407, a power combination support process for controlling the driving of the motor combination 44 a provided in the first right start port 44 is executed. In the electric combination support process, it is determined whether or not the electric combination 44a is opened. The details of the power combination support process will be described later. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S408.

  In step S408, a game ball launch control process is executed. The game ball launch control process is a process executed to launch a game ball into the game area PA when the operation handle 25 or the game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player. Details of the game ball launch control process will be described later. After executing Step S408, the process proceeds to Step S409.

  In step S409, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current normal process (after the second round, the start of the command output process in step S402). That is, it is determined whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has been reached.

  If it is determined in step S409 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the current normal process (S409: NO), the execution timing of the next normal process is reached in steps S410 and S411. The random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time. Specifically, in step S410, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. In step S411, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S409 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed since the start of the current normal process (S409: YES), the process returns to step S402, and the processes from step S402 to step S408 are performed. Run.

  Since the execution time of each process from step S402 to step S408 changes according to the game state, the remaining time until the next normal process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game times control process will be described. The game times control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of a normal process (FIG. 17: S405).

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the game times control process. In step S501, it is determined whether the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The opening / closing execution mode flag is turned on when the gaming state is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode in the gaming state transition process described later, and is turned off when the opening / closing execution mode is ended in the gaming state transition process.

  If it is determined in step S501 that the opening / closing execution mode is in effect (S501: YES), the game turn control process is terminated without executing any of the processes after step S502. That is, when the opening / closing execution mode is being performed, whether or not a game ball has entered the first start port (the first start port 33 on the center side, the first start port 44 on the right side) or the second start port 34 has occurred. Regardless of whether or not the game times will not be started. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S501 that the opening / closing execution mode is not in effect (S501: NO), the process proceeds to step S502.

  In step S502, it is determined whether or not the first changing flag is ON. The first symbol in the first symbol display unit 37a fluctuates in the first changing flag when the game ball enters the first starting port (the first first starting port 33, the right first starting port 44). Is a flag that is turned on when starting and is turned off when the first symbol stops changing. If it is determined in step S502 that the first changing flag is not ON (S502: NO), the process proceeds to step S503.

  In step S503, the fluctuation start process for the first start port is executed. Details of the variation start process for the first start port will be described later. After executing Step S503, the process proceeds to Step S505.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S502 that the first changing flag is ON (S502: YES), the process proceeds to step S504. In step S504, a first fluctuation stop process is executed. Details of the first fluctuation stop process will be described later. After executing Step S504, the process proceeds to Step S505.

  In step S505, it is determined whether or not the second changing flag is ON. As described above, the second changing flag is turned ON when the second symbol of the second symbol display unit 37b starts to change when the game ball enters the second starting port 34. This is a flag that is turned OFF when the symbol 2 stops changing. If it is determined in step S505 that the second changing flag is not ON (S505: NO), the process proceeds to step S506.

  In step S506, the variation start process for the second start port is executed. Details of the variation start process for the second start port will be described later. After executing step S506, the game times control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S505 that the second changing flag is ON (S505: YES), the process proceeds to step S507.

  In step S507, the second variation stop process is executed. Details of the second variation stop process will be described later. After executing step S507, the game times control process is terminated.

<Variation start processing for the first start port>
Next, the fluctuation start process for the first start port will be described. The variation start process for the first start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game times control process (FIG. 18: S503).

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process for the first start port. In step S601, it is determined whether or not the first start hold number RaN = 0. If it is determined in step S601 that the first start hold number RaN = 0 is not satisfied (S601: NO), the process proceeds to step S602. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S601 that the first start hold number RaN = 0 (S601: YES), the variation start process for the first start port is terminated.

  In step S602, a hold information shift process is executed. In the hold information shift process, the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra is shifted. Details of the hold information shift processing will be described later. After executing Step S602, the process proceeds to Step S603.

  In step S603, a determination process for the first start port is executed. In the determination process for the first start port, the big hit lottery is executed based on the special information stored in the determination process execution area 64c. Specifically, whether or not to determine whether or not there is a jackpot or a small hit based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, and sorts the jackpot type Distribution determination and reach determination for determining whether or not reach has occurred. Details of the determination process for the first start port will be described later. After executing Step S603, the process proceeds to Step S604.

  In step S604, the process for setting the variation time for the first start port is executed. In the setting process of the variation time for the first start port, a variation time that is a time from the start of the symbol to the stop is set. Details of the process for setting the variation time for the first start port will be described later. After executing Step S604, the process proceeds to Step S605.

  In step S605, a first variation command is set. The first variation command relates to special information acquired based on the game ball entering the first start port (the first start port 33 on the central side or the first start port 44 on the right side). In addition to the information indicating the presence of information, information on presence / absence of reach and information on the variation time set in step S604 are included. After executing Step S605, the process proceeds to Step S606.

  In step S606, a first type command is set. The first type command includes information on presence / absence of jackpot and jackpot type information. Specifically, the first type command includes information on 16R probability variation jackpot information, information on 8R probability variation jackpot, information on 8R normal jackpot, or outlier information.

  The variation command and the first type command set in step S605 and step S606 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S402 in the normal process (FIG. 17). Based on the received change command and the first type command, the sound emission control device 90 determines the contents of the effect in the game time and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed. After executing Step S606, the process proceeds to Step S607.

  In step S607, the variable display on the first symbol display unit 37a is started, and then the process proceeds to step S608, where the first variable flag is set to ON. After executing Step S608, the process proceeds to Step S609.

  In step S609, 1 is subtracted from the value of the game number counter PCN. The game number counter PCN is set to a value in the game number counter PCN when the high frequency support mode is started, and the counter value is decremented by 1 each time the game number is executed. After executing step S609, the variation start process for the first start port is terminated.

<Holding information shift process>
Next, the hold information shift process will be described. The hold information shift process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the change start process for the first start port (FIG. 19: S602).

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the hold information shift process. In step S701, 1 is subtracted from the first start hold number RaN of the first hold area Ra. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  In step S702, the data (holding information) stored in the first area of the first holding area Ra is moved to the first execution area of the determination process execution area 64c. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S703.

  In step S703, a process of shifting data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted such as second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. After executing step S703, the hold information shift process is terminated.

<Determination process for the first start port>
Next, the determination process for the first start port will be described. The determination process for the first start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine for the change start process for the first start port (FIG. 19: S603).

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the determination process for the first start port. In step S801, it is determined whether or not the second hit flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The second hit flag is turned ON when the lottery result of the big hit lottery executed when the game ball enters the second start port 34 is “big hit” or “small hit”, and the second start The change display of the second symbol due to the game ball entering the mouth 34 is stopped and turned OFF when the stop display is made. If it is determined in step S801 that the second hit flag is not ON (S801: NO), the process proceeds to step S802. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S801 that the second hit flag is ON (S801: YES), the process proceeds to step S816.

  In step S802, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is a high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high probability mode flag is a flag for specifying in the MPU 62 whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. In the present embodiment, the high probability mode flag is turned on when the open / close execution mode related to the winning of the probable big hit is completed. Normally, it is turned OFF at the end of the opening / closing execution mode related to the big win. If it is determined in step S802 that the mode is the high probability mode (S802: YES), the process proceeds to step S803.

  In step S803, whether or not it is determined is determined with reference to the first start / failure table (for the high probability mode). Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c is set as a jackpot in the first start opening success / failure table (for high probability mode) shown in FIG. 7B. It is determined whether or not it matches a certain value. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S805. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S802 that the mode is not the high probability mode (S802: NO), the process proceeds to step S804.

  In step S804, the determination is made with reference to the first start / failure table (for the low probability mode). Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c is set as a jackpot in the first start opening success / failure table (for low probability mode) shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it matches a certain value. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S805.

  In step S805, it is determined whether or not the determination result in step S803 or step S804 is a big hit. If it is determined in step S805 that the result of the determination is a jackpot (S805: YES), the process proceeds to step S806.

  In step S806, the first hit flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. As for the first winning flag, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery executed when the game ball enters the first starting port (the central first starting port 33 or the right first starting port 44) is “big hit”. Is turned on, and the first symbol variation display due to the game ball entering the first start port is stopped, and turned off when the display is stopped. After executing Step S806, the process proceeds to Step S807.

  In step S807, the distribution determination is performed with reference to the distribution table for the first start port (see FIG. 9A). Specifically, it is determined which jackpot type numerical value range contains the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c. After executing Step S807, the process proceeds to Step S808.

  In step S808, it is determined whether or not the result of the allocation determination in step S807 (a jackpot type) is a probability variation jackpot. If it is determined in step S808 that the assigned jackpot type is a probable jackpot (S808: YES), the process proceeds to step S809.

  In step S809, the probability variation big hit flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the big hit type assigned in step S808 is turned ON. After executing Step S809, the process proceeds to Step S810.

  In step S810, a stop symbol setting process for probability variation big hit is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for the probability variation jackpot, in the current game round that is a probability variation jackpot, it is set in the first symbol display section 37a which stop result is displayed and the variation display is terminated (stop display). Execute the process for Specifically, by referring to the probability variation jackpot stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S808 is acquired, and Address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S810, the first start-up port determination process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S808 that the assigned jackpot type is not a probabilistic jackpot (S808: NO), that is, if the assigned jackpot type is a normal jackpot, the process proceeds to step S811.

  In step S811, the normal jackpot flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the big hit type assigned in step S808 is turned ON. After executing Step S811, the process proceeds to Step S812.

  In step S812, a normal jackpot stop symbol setting process is executed. In the normal jackpot stop symbol setting process, in the current game round, which is a normal jackpot, the first symbol display unit 37a is set to which stop result is displayed and the variable display is ended (stop display). Execute the process for Specifically, by referring to the normal big hit stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the big hit type distributed in step S808 is acquired, and the Address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S812, the first start opening determination process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S805 that the result of the determination in step S803 or step S804 is not a big win (S805: NO), the process proceeds to step S813, and the reach stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 is reached. With reference to the determination table, reach determination is made as to whether or not reach occurs. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the determination process execution area 64c matches the value set as the reach occurrence in the referenced reach determination table. The process of step S813 is executed when the result of the determination of success / failure (big hit lottery) in step S805 is not a big win. That is, in step S813, it is determined whether or not the game times in which reach is generated among the game times in which the determination result is not a big hit. After executing Step S813, the process proceeds to Step S814.

  In step S814, it is determined whether or not the result of the reach determination in step S813 is the occurrence of reach. If it is determined in step S814 that a reach has occurred (S814: YES), the process proceeds to step S815, and the reach occurrence flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing Step S815, the process proceeds to Step S816. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S814 that no reach has occurred (S814: NO), the process proceeds to step S816 without executing step S815.

  In step S816, a stop symbol setting process for removal is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for detachment, in this game game that becomes detachment, in order to set which stop result is displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a, the variable display is ended (stop display). Execute the process. Specifically, by referring to the outage stop result table in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c is obtained. The address information is acquired and stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S816, the determination process for the first start port is terminated.

  Here, as described above, when it is determined in step S801 that the second winning flag is ON (S801: YES), the process proceeds to step S816, and the stop symbol setting process for detachment is executed. A stop display for removal is displayed on the first symbol display section 37a. That is, the game ball enters the second start port 34 first, and before the second symbol variation display due to the game ball entering the second start port 34 stops, the first start port (center When the game ball enters the first start port 33 on the right side or the first start port 44 on the right side), the lottery result of the big hit lottery triggered by the game ball entering the second start port 34 is “big hit” ”Or“ small hit ”, do not execute the big hit lottery triggered by the game ball entering the first starting port (the first starting port 33 on the central side or the first starting port 44 on the right side) A stop display for removal is displayed on the first symbol display section 37a. In addition, the lottery result of the big hit lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34 is “big hit” or “small win” by the fluctuation stop process (FIG. 23) of the first start port described later. In this case, the second symbol of the second symbol display unit 37b shifts from the variable display to the stop display, and at the same time, the first symbol of the first symbol display unit 37a shifts from the variable display to the stop display (FIG. 23: S1001, S1007 to S1010). Further, as described above, the first symbol and the second symbol do not start the variable display until the opening / closing execution mode is ended by the process of step S501 of the game turn control process (FIG. 18).

  As a result, the first symbol display portion 37a is displayed from the time when the combination of symbols that will cause the variable winning device 36 to be operated is displayed on the second symbol display portion 37b to the time when the operation of the variable winning device 36 is terminated. Will stop at the symbol that will not activate the variable winning device 36, and will continue to display as it is.

<Variation time setting process for the first start port>
Next, the variation time setting process for the first start port will be described. The variation time setting process for the first start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 19: S604) of the variation start process for the first start port.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the process for setting the variation time for the first start port. In step S901, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S902.

  In step S902, it is determined whether or not the result of the determination as to whether or not the current game round is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variation jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is ON. If any flag is ON (S902: YES), the process proceeds to step S903.

  In step S903, referring to the big hit fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. After executing step S903, the process proceeds to step S907, and the obtained variation time information is set in the variation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process for setting the variation time for the first start port is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S902 that the result of the determination regarding the current game round is not a big win (S902: NO), the process proceeds to step S904, and the result of the reach determination related to the current game round is the occurrence of reach. It is determined whether or not. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reach occurrence flag is ON. If it is determined that the reach occurrence flag is ON (S904: YES), the process proceeds to step S905.

  In step S905, referring to the reach occurrence variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, the variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired. After executing Step S905, the process proceeds to Step S907, and the obtained variation time information is set in the variation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process for setting the variation time for the first start port is terminated.

  In step S904, if it is determined that the reach determination result relating to the current game round is not a reach occurrence (S904: NO), the process proceeds to step S906, and no reach is stored in the variation time table storage area 63d. The fluctuation time corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired with reference to the fluctuation time table for use. After executing Step S906, the process proceeds to Step S907, and the obtained variation time information is set in the variation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process for setting the variation time for the first start port is terminated.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the variation time information stored in the reach non-occurrence variation time table is set so that the variation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start suspension number RaN is larger. . However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration that does not depend on the number of the first start hold number RaN may be used, and the variation time is set shorter as the number of the first start hold number RaN is smaller. May be.

  Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variation time at the time of reach occurrence, and the variation time that is easy to select and the variation time that is difficult to select at the time of jackpot winning and out of reach reach may be different Good. In addition, a variation time table for probability variation jackpot and a variation time table for normal jackpot may be set individually.

<First change stop processing>
Next, the first variation stop process will be described. The first variation stop process is executed by the main MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game times control process (FIG. 18: S504).

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the first fluctuation stop process. In step S1001, it is determined whether or not the second hit flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The second hit flag is turned ON when the lottery result of the big hit lottery executed when the game ball enters the second start port 34 is “big hit” or “small hit”, and the second start The change display of the second symbol due to the game ball entering the mouth 34 is stopped and turned OFF when the stop display is made. If it is determined in step S1001 that the second hit flag is not ON (S1001: NO), the process proceeds to step S1002.

  In step S1002, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the first symbol display section 37a has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variation time for the first symbol set in the variation processing setting process (FIG. 22) for the first start port has elapsed. If it is determined in step S1002 that the variation time of the first symbol display unit 37a has ended (S1002: YES), the process proceeds to step S1003. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1002 that the variation time of the first symbol display unit 37a has not ended (S1002: NO), the first variation stop process is terminated.

  In step S1003, the fluctuation of the first symbol display unit 37a is stopped. In other words, the first symbol of the first symbol display unit 37a is shifted from the state where it is variably displayed to the stop display. The combination of symbols to be stopped (stop symbols) is set in step S801, step S812, or step S816 of the determination process for the first start port (FIG. 21). After executing Step S1003, the process proceeds to Step S1004.

  In step S1004, the first changing flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned OFF. As described above, the first changing flag is set in the first symbol display portion 37a when the game ball enters the first starting port (the first first starting port 33 on the central side, the first starting port 44 on the right side). This is a flag that is turned on when one symbol starts changing and is turned off when the first symbol stops changing. After executing Step S1004, the process proceeds to Step S1005.

  In step S1005, it is determined whether or not the second changing flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. As described above, the second changing flag is turned ON when the second symbol of the second symbol display unit 37b starts to change when the game ball enters the second starting port 34. This is a flag that is turned OFF when the symbol 2 stops changing. If it is determined in step S1005 that the second changing flag is not ON (S1005: NO), the process proceeds to step S1006.

  In step S1006, the first hit flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the first variation stop process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1005 that the second variation flag is ON (S1005: YES), the first variation stop process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S1001 that the second hit flag is ON (S1001: YES), the process proceeds to step S1007.

  In step S1007, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the second symbol display section 37b has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second symbol variation time set in the second startup port variation time setting process (FIG. 26) described later has elapsed. If it is determined in step S1007 that the variation time of the second symbol display unit 37b has not ended (S1007: NO), the process proceeds to step S1002. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1007 that the variation time of the second symbol display unit 37b has ended (S1007: YES), the process proceeds to step S1008.

  In step S1008, the second hit flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned OFF. After executing Step S1008, the process proceeds to Step S1009.

  In step S1009, the fluctuation of the first symbol display section 37a is stopped. In other words, the first symbol of the first symbol display unit 37a is shifted from the state where it is variably displayed to the stop display. The combination of symbols to be stopped (stop symbols) is set in step S801, step S812, or step S816 of the determination process for the first start port (FIG. 21). After executing Step S1009, the process proceeds to Step S1010.

  In step S1010, the first changing flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned OFF. Thereafter, the first variation stop process is terminated.

<Variation start processing for the second start port>
Next, the fluctuation start process for the second start port will be described. The variation start process for the second start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game times control process (FIG. 18: S506).

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the variation start process for the second start port. In step S1101, it is determined whether or not the second start entrance ball flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S1101 that the second starting entrance ball flag is ON (S1101: YES), the process proceeds to step S1102. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1101 that the second start port entrance flag is not ON (S1101: NO), the variation start process for the second start port is terminated.

  In step S1102, the second start entrance ball flag is turned OFF. After executing Step S1102, the process proceeds to Step S1103.

  In step S1103, determination processing for the second start port is executed. In the determination process for the second start port, the big hit lottery is executed based on the special information stored in the determination process execution area 64c. Specifically, whether or not to determine whether or not there is a jackpot or a small hit based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, and sorts the jackpot type Distribution determination and reach determination for determining whether or not reach has occurred. Details of the determination process for the second start port will be described later. After executing Step S1103, the process proceeds to Step S1104.

  In step S1104, the process for setting the variation time for the second start port is executed. In the setting process of the variation time for the second start port, a variation time that is a time from the start of the symbol to the stop is set. Details of the process for setting the variation time for the second start port will be described later. After executing Step S1104, the process proceeds to Step S1105.

  In step S1105, a second variation command is set. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game time relates to special information acquired based on the game ball entering the second start port 34, and reach. Information on presence / absence of occurrence and information on the variation time set in step S1104 are included. After executing Step S1105, the process proceeds to Step S1106.

  In step S1106, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence / absence of jackpot or jackpot and information on the jackpot type. Specifically, the type command includes 2R normal jackpot information, small jackpot information, or missed information.

  The variation command and type command set in steps S1105 and S1106 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S402 in the normal process (FIG. 17). Based on the received change command and type command, the sound emission control device 90 determines the contents of the effect at the game time and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed. After executing Step S1106, the process proceeds to Step S1107.

  In step S1107, skip command setting processing is executed. Details of the skip command setting process will be described later. After executing Step S1107, the process proceeds to Step S1108.

  In step S1108, the variable display on the second symbol display section 37b is started. Note that, in the determination process for the second starting port in step S1103, which will be described in detail later, when it is determined that the reach has occurred, the reach generation flag is set to ON. In this case, the reach generation flag is set to OFF. To do. After executing Step S1108, the process proceeds to Step S1109.

  In step S1109, the second changing flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing Step S1109, the process proceeds to Step S1110.

  In step S1110, 1 is subtracted from the counter value of the game number counter PNC. Thereafter, the variation start process for the second start port is terminated.

<Decision processing for second start port>
Next, the determination process for the second start port will be described. The determination process for the second start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine for the change start process for the second start port (FIG. 24: S1103).

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the determination process for the second start port. In step S1201, it is determined whether or not the first hit flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S1201 that the first hit flag is not ON (S1201: NO), the process proceeds to step S1202.

  In step S1202, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is a high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high probability mode flag is a flag for specifying in the MPU 62 whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. In the present embodiment, the high probability mode flag is turned on when the open / close execution mode related to the winning of the probable big hit is completed. Normally, it is turned OFF at the end of the opening / closing execution mode related to the big win. If it is determined in step S1202 that the mode is the high probability mode (S1202: YES), the process proceeds to step S1203.

  In step S1203, the success / failure determination is performed with reference to the success / failure table for the second start port (for high probability mode). Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is set as a jackpot in the second start opening success / failure table (for high probability mode) shown in FIG. 8B. It is determined whether or not it matches a certain value. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1205. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1202 that the mode is not the high probability mode (S1202: NO), the process proceeds to step S1204.

  In step S1204, whether or not to win is determined with reference to a second start / fail table (for the low probability mode). Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is set as a jackpot in the second start opening success / failure table (for low probability mode) shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it matches a certain value. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1205.

  In step S1205, it is determined whether or not the determination result in step S1203 or step S1204 is a big hit. If it is determined in step S1205 that the result of the determination is a big hit (S1205: YES), the process proceeds to step S1206.

  In step S1206, the second hit flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing Step S1206, the process proceeds to Step S1207.

  In step S1207, the distribution determination is performed with reference to the distribution table for the second start port (see FIG. 9B). Specifically, it is determined which jackpot type numerical value range contains the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c. In the present embodiment, 2R normal jackpot is set as the jackpot type in the sorting table for the second start port. After executing Step S1207, the process proceeds to Step S1208. In the present embodiment, since only the 2R normal jackpot is set as the jackpot type in the distribution table for the second start port, the processing from step S1208 to step S1210 described below is performed in this embodiment. Not executed.

  In step S1208, it is determined whether or not the result of the allocation determination in step S1207 (a jackpot type) is a probability variation jackpot. If it is determined in step S1208 that the assigned jackpot type is a probable jackpot (S1208: YES), the process advances to step S1209.

  In step S1209, the flag corresponding to the jackpot type assigned in step S1208 (big hit type flag) is turned ON. As described above, in the present embodiment, since only the 2R normal jackpot is set as the jackpot type in the distribution table for the second start port, this processing is not executed. After executing Step S1209, the process proceeds to Step S1210.

  In step S1210, a stop symbol setting process for probability variation big hit is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for the probability variation jackpot, in the current game round that is a probability variation jackpot, the second symbol display unit 37b is set to which stop result is displayed and the variation display is terminated (stop display). Execute the process for Specifically, by referring to the probability variation jackpot stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S1208 is acquired, and Address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S1210, the determination process for the second start port is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S1208 that the assigned jackpot type is not a probabilistic jackpot (S1208: NO), that is, if the assigned jackpot type is a normal jackpot, the process proceeds to step S1211.

  In step S1211, the flag corresponding to the jackpot type assigned in step S1208 (big hit type flag) is turned ON. In the present embodiment, since only the 2R normal jackpot is set as the jackpot type in the distribution table for the second start port, the jackpot type flag corresponding to the 2R normal jackpot is set to ON. After executing Step S1211, the process proceeds to Step S1212.

  In step S1212, a stop pattern setting process for normal jackpot is executed. In the normal jackpot stop symbol setting process, a process for setting which stop result is displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b in the current game round, which is a normal jackpot, is set to end the variable display. Run. Specifically, by referring to the normal jackpot stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S1208 is acquired. Address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S1212, the determination process for the second start port is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S1205 that the result of the determination in step S1203 or step S1204 is not a big win (S1205: NO), the process proceeds to step S1311, and it is determined whether or not the result of the determination is small. . Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is included in the numerical value range for the big hit. If it is determined in step S1213 that the result of the determination is a small hit (S1213: YES), the process proceeds to step S1214.

  In step S1214, the second hit flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1215, and the small hit flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing Step S1215, the process proceeds to Step S1216.

  In step S1216, a stop symbol setting process for small hits is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for small hits, a process for setting which stop result is displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b in the state where the variable display is ended is displayed in the second game round which is a small hit. Run. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for small hits in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of stop result data corresponding to the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c And the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing Step S1216, the determination process for the second start port is ended.

  If it is determined in step S1201 that the first hit flag is ON (S1201: YES), or if it is determined in step S1213 that the determination result is not small hit (S1213: NO) The stop symbol setting process is executed. Stop symbol setting process for detachment is a process for setting which stop result is displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b in the state where the variable display is to be ended in the current game round that is out of play. To do. Specifically, by referring to the outage stop result table in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c is obtained. The address information is acquired and stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S1217, the determination process for the second start port is terminated.

  In the determination process for the second start port, unlike the determination process for the first start port described in FIG. 21 (FIG. 21: S813 to S815), a process for generating reach using the reach random number counter C3. Do not execute. In the present embodiment, the second symbol variation display based on the game ball entering the second start port 34 is mainly intended to stop the first symbol variation display. Therefore, when the player operates the game ball launch button 26 to intentionally enter the game ball into the second start port 34, the first time is as close as possible to the timing when the game ball launch button 26 is operated. It is desirable that the second symbol shifts from the variable display to the stop display. Therefore, it is not desirable to execute a reach effect that requires a relatively long time as an effect to be performed while the second symbol based on the game ball entering the second start port 34 is variably displayed. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the second start port is used in order to prevent the reach effect from being performed when the second symbol variation display based on the game ball entering the second start port 34 is performed. In the determination process, the reach generation by the reach random number counter C3 is not executed.

<Variation time setting process for second start port>
Next, the process for setting the variation time for the second start port will be described. The process for setting the variation time for the second start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine for the variation start process for the second start port (FIG. 24: S1104).

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the process for setting the variation time for the second start port. In step S1301, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1302.

  In step S1302, the variation time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS of this time is acquired with reference to the variation time table for the second start port stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. In the present embodiment, the variation times set in the variation time table for the second start port referred to in the process for setting the variation time for the second start port are all 1 second. As described above, in the present embodiment, the second symbol variation display based on the game ball entering the second starting port 34 is mainly intended to stop the first symbol variation display. Yes. Therefore, when the player operates the game ball launch button 26 to intentionally enter the game ball into the second start port 34, the first time is as close as possible to the timing when the game ball launch button 26 is operated. It is desirable that the second symbol shifts from the variable display to the stop display. Accordingly, the variation time table for the second start port is set so that the variation time of the second symbol based on the game ball entering the second start port 34 is 1 second, which is a relatively short time. Yes. After executing step S1302, the process proceeds to step S1303, and the obtained variation time information is set in the variation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process for setting the variation time for the second start port is terminated.

<Second variation stop processing>
Next, the second variation stop process will be described. The second variation stop process is executed by the main MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game times control process (FIG. 18: S507).

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the second variation stop process. In step S1401, it is determined whether or not the first hit flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. As for the first winning flag, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery executed when the game ball enters the first starting port (the central first starting port 33 or the right first starting port 44) is “big hit”. In this case, it is turned ON, and the first symbol variation display due to the game ball entering the first start port is stopped and turned OFF when the stop display is made. If it is determined in step S1401 that the first hit flag is not ON (S1401: NO), the process proceeds to step S1402.

  In step S1402, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the second symbol display unit 37b has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second symbol variation time set in the second start port variation time setting process (FIG. 26) has elapsed. If it is determined in step S1402 that the variation time of the second symbol display unit 37b has ended (S1402: YES), the process proceeds to step S1403. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1402 that the variation time of the second symbol display unit 37b has not ended (S1402: NO), the second variation stop process is terminated.

  In step S1403, the variation of the second symbol display unit 37b is stopped. That is, the second symbol of the second symbol display unit 37b is changed from being variably displayed to being stopped. The combination of symbols to be stopped (stop symbols) is set in step S1210, step S1212, step S1216, or step S1217 of the determination process for the second start port (FIG. 25). After executing step S1403, the process proceeds to step S1404.

  In step S1404, the second changing flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned OFF. As described above, the second changing flag is turned ON when the second symbol of the second symbol display unit 37b starts to change when the game ball enters the second starting port 34. This is a flag that is turned OFF when the symbol 2 stops changing. After executing Step S1404, the process proceeds to Step S1405.

  In step S1405, it is determined whether or not the first changing flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. As described above, the first changing flag is set in the first symbol display portion 37a when the game ball enters the first start port (the first start port 33 on the center side or the first start port 44 on the right side). This is a flag that is turned on when one symbol starts changing and is turned off when the first symbol stops changing. If it is determined in step S1405 that the first changing flag is not ON (S1405: NO), the process proceeds to step S1406.

  In step S1406, the second hit flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the second variation stop process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1405 that the first variation flag is ON (S1405: YES), the second variation stop process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S1401 that the first hit flag is ON (S1401: YES), the process proceeds to step S1407.

  In step S1407, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the first symbol display unit 37a has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variation time for the first symbol set in the variation processing setting process (FIG. 22) for the first start port has elapsed. If it is determined in step S1407 that the variation time of the first symbol display unit 37a has not ended (S1407: NO), the process proceeds to step S1402. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1407 that the variation time of the first symbol display unit 37a has ended (S1407: YES), the process proceeds to step S1408.

  In step S1408, the first hit flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned OFF. After executing step S1408, the process proceeds to step S1409.

  In step S1409, the fluctuation of the second symbol display unit 37b is stopped. That is, the first symbol of the second symbol display unit 37b is changed from being variably displayed to being stopped. The combination of symbols to be stopped (stop symbols) is set in step S1210, step S1212, step S1216, or step S1217 of the determination process for the second start port (FIG. 25). After executing Step S1409, the process proceeds to Step S1410.

  In step S1410, the second changing flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned OFF. Thereafter, the second variation stop process is terminated.

<Skip command setting process>
Next, skip command setting processing will be described. The skip command setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the change start process for the second start port (FIG. 24: S1107).

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing skip command setting processing. The skip command setting process is a process for determining whether or not to execute the above-described skip effect (see FIG. 11A) and the skip impossible effect (see FIG. 13A).

  In step S1501, it is determined whether or not the remaining time of the variation time of the first symbol display unit 37a is 1 second or more. If it is determined in step S1501 that the remaining time of the variation time of the first symbol display unit 37a is not 1 second or longer (S1501: NO), the setting process of the skip command is terminated as it is. As described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 12, the skip effect and the skip impossible effect are performed using the variation time of the second symbol. As described above, since the variation times of the second symbol are all set to 1 second, it takes 1 second to execute the skip effect or the skip impossible effect. Therefore, when the remaining time of the variation time of the first symbol display portion 37a is less than 1 second, neither the skip effect nor the skip impossible effect is executed. When the remaining time of the variation time of the 1st symbol display part 37a is less than 1 second, the effect set for the variation | change display of the 1st symbol is performed as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1501 that the remaining time of the variation time of the first symbol display unit 37a is 1 second or longer (S1501: YES), the process proceeds to step S1502, and the first hit flag is ON. Determine whether or not. If it is determined in step S1502 that the first hit flag is ON (S1502: YES), the process proceeds to step S1503.

  In step S1503, a first skip disable command is set. The first non-skippable command is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device, that is, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, to recognize that the non-skippable effect is executed. By (FIG. 17: step S402), it transmits to the audio | voice light emission control apparatus 90. After executing step S1503, the skip command setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1502 that the first hit flag is not ON (S1502: NO), the process proceeds to step S1504. In step S1504, it is determined whether or not the second hit flag is ON. If it is determined in step S1504 that the second hit flag is ON (S1504: YES), the process proceeds to step S1505.

  In step S1505, a skip execution command is set. The skip execution command is a command including information for causing the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, to execute the skip effect, and is a command output process (FIG. 17) of the normal process. : Transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S402). After executing step S1505, the skip command setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S1504 that the second hit flag is not ON (S1504: NO), the process proceeds to step S1506. In step S1506, the second skip disable command is set. The second non-skippable command is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device, that is, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, to execute the non-skippable effect, and is a command output process of normal processing. By (FIG. 17: step S402), it transmits to the audio | voice light emission control apparatus 90. After executing step S1506, the skip command setting process is terminated.

  Here, the difference between the first skip disable command set in step S1503 and the second skip skip command set in step S1506 will be described.

  The first skip disable command is set in the following cases. After the first symbol starts to be displayed in the middle of the first start opening 33 (or the right first start opening 44) on the center side, the game ball enters the second start opening 34. In the case where the second symbol starts to be displayed as a trigger, and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port is “jackpot”, At the timing when the second symbol variation display shifts to the stop display, the first symbol variation display does not shift to the stop display, and is set in the variation time setting process (FIG. 22) for the first start port. Stop display when the fluctuation time has elapsed. In this case, the first skip disable command is set and the skip effect is not executed.

  The second skip disable command is set in the following cases. After the first symbol starts to be displayed in the middle of the first start opening 33 (or the right first start opening 44) on the center side, the game ball enters the second start opening 34. When the second symbol starts to be displayed as a trigger, and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by entering the second starting port is “out” (instead of “big hit” , If it is not “small hit”), the change of the first symbol at the timing when the change display of the second symbol triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 34 shifts to the stop display. The display does not shift to the stop display. In this case, the second skip disable command is set and the skip effect is not executed. However, in this case, if the second symbol variation display is executed a plurality of times while the first symbol is in the variation display, the game ball enters the second starting port as an opportunity. When the lottery result of the big hit lottery is “out”, the first symbol variation display does not shift to the stop display, and the second skip disable command is set at that timing, and the skip disable effect is executed. If the lottery result of the big hit lottery triggered by the game ball entering the second starting port executed next is “big hit” or “small hit”, a skip execution command is set (S1505). The skip effect is executed at the timing when the second symbol variation display triggered by the game ball entering the second start port 34 is started, and at the timing when the second symbol shifts to the stop display. When the skip production ends , The variable display of the first symbol is shifted to stop the display.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, game state transition processing will be described. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of a normal process (FIG. 17: S406).

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process. In step S1601, it is determined whether an ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned on at the start of the ending period in the opening / closing execution mode, and is turned off at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing an ending effect in the opening / closing execution mode.

  If it is determined in step S1601 that the ending period flag is not ON (S1601: NO), the process proceeds to step S1602, and it is determined whether the opening / closing process period flag is ON. The open / close process period flag is turned on at the start of the open / close process period and turned off at the end of the open / close process period.

  If it is determined in step S1602 that the opening / closing process period flag is not ON (S1602: NO), the process proceeds to step S1603, and it is determined whether the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned on at the start of the opening period and turned off at the end of the opening period.

  If it is determined in step S1603 that the opening period flag is not ON (S1603: NO), the process proceeds to step S1604, and the timing at which the symbol variation display on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b ends. It is determined whether or not. In step S1604, when it is determined that it is not the timing when the variable display is finished (S1604: NO), the gaming state transition process is finished.

  In step S1604, if it is determined that it is the timing when the variable display is finished (S1604: YES), the process proceeds to step S1605, and the result of the big hit lottery of the current game time corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. It is determined whether or not there is. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R normal jackpot flag, 2R normal jackpot flag, or small hit flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined that none of the above flags is ON (S1605: NO), the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S1605 that the result of the big game lottery of the current game time corresponds to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode (S1605: YES), the process proceeds to step S1606, and the opening / closing execution mode flag is turned ON. To do. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1607.

  In step S1607, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the time length of the opening period (hereinafter also referred to as opening time) in the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, “3000” (that is, 6.0 sec) or “0” (that is, 0.0 sec) is set in the timer counter area To indicating the remaining time of the opening period. The timer counter area To is provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64, and the value set in the timer counter area To is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, every 2 msec. Details of the opening time setting process will be described later. After executing Step S1607, the process proceeds to Step S1608.

  In step S1608, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S402 in the normal process (FIG. 17). This opening command includes information on the set opening time. Based on the received opening command, the sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening time, and controls various devices so that the effect of the determined content is executed. After executing step S1608, the process proceeds to step S1609, and the opening period flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S1603 that the opening period flag is ON (S1603: YES), the process proceeds to step S1610.

  In step S1610, it is determined whether or not the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter area To is “0”. If it is determined in step S1610 that the opening period has ended (S1610: YES), the process proceeds to step S1611 and the opening period flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1612.

  In step S1612, a round display start process is performed to notify the type of the current opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is confirmed. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is determined from the specified stop result data. Check. Thereafter, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45. As a result, the round display unit 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing Step S1612, the process proceeds to Step S1613.

  In step S1613, the number of rounds in the current opening / closing execution mode is set. Specifically, the jackpot type flag (16R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R normal jackpot flag, 2R normal jackpot flag) and the small hit flag stored in the RAM 64 are checked, and the number of rounds corresponding to the flag Are set in the first round counter area RC1 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the opening / closing door 36b is opened. Details of the round number setting process will be described later. After executing S1613, the process proceeds to step S1614.

  In step S1614, an opening / closing process command is set. The set opening / closing process command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S402 in the normal process (FIG. 17). This open / close processing command includes information on the number of rounds in the current open / close processing period. Based on the received opening / closing process command, the sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the number of rounds, and controls various devices so that the determined content is executed. After executing Step S1614, the process proceeds to Step S1615.

  In step S1615, the open / close process period flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S1602 that the opening / closing process period flag is ON (S1602: YES), the process proceeds to step S1616, and a big prize opening / closing process is executed. Specifically, when the grand prize winning opening 36a is closed, the variable prize driving unit 36c is set in the driving state on condition that the first round counter area RC1 is “1” or more. The mouth 36a is opened. In addition, when the grand prize winning opening 36a is being opened, on condition that the opening limit time has elapsed since the opening of the special winning prize opening 36a or that the opening limit number of game balls have entered, The driving state of the variable winning drive unit 36c is stopped, and the special winning opening 36a is closed. Details of the big prize opening / closing process will be described later. After executing Step S1616, the process proceeds to Step S1617.

  In step S1617, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”. When it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not “0” (S1617: NO), the gaming state transition process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” (S1617: YES), the process proceeds to step S1618, and the open / close processing period flag is turned OFF. After executing Step S1618, the process proceeds to Step S1619.

  In step S1619, a round display end process is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display unit 39 is terminated so that the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is turned off. After executing Step S1619, the process proceeds to Step S1620.

  In step S1620, an ending time setting process is executed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting a time length of an ending period in the opening / closing execution mode (hereinafter also referred to as an ending time). Specifically, “3000” (that is, 6.0 sec) or “0” (that is, 0 sec) is set in the timer counter area Te indicating the remaining time of the ending period. The timer counter area Te is provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64, and the value set in the timer counter area Te is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, every 2 msec. The ending time setting process will be described later. After executing Step S1620, the process proceeds to Step S1621.

  In step S1621, an ending command is set. The set ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S402 in the normal process (FIG. 17). This ending command includes information on the set ending time. Based on the received ending command, the sound emission control device 90 ends the effect corresponding to the opening / closing process period, determines the content of the effect corresponding to the ending time, and the effect of the determined content is executed. Control various devices. After executing Step S1621, the process proceeds to Step S1622.

  In step S1622, the ending period flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S1601 that the ending period flag is ON (S1601: YES), the process proceeds to step S1623.

  In step S1623, it is determined whether or not the ending period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter area Te set as the ending time in the ending time setting process (S1620) is “0”. If it is determined in step S1623 that the value of the timer counter area Te set as the ending time is “0” (S1623: YES), the process proceeds to step S1624.

  In step S1624, the ending period flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1625, and the opening / closing execution mode flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1626, and a transition process at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of game times after the end of the current ending period. Details of the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing Step S1626, the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1623 that the value of the timer counter area Te set as the ending time is not “0” (S1623: NO), the gaming state transition process is terminated.

<Opening time setting process>
Next, the opening time setting process will be described. The opening time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 29: S1607) of the game state transition process.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the opening time setting process. In step S1701, it is determined whether or not the trigger for shifting to the current opening / closing execution mode is a big hit. Specifically, when any of the jackpot type flags (16R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R normal jackpot flag, 2R normal jackpot flag) stored in the RAM 64 is ON, the current opening / closing execution is performed. It is determined that the trigger for shifting to the mode is a jackpot.

  If it is determined in step S1701 that the trigger for shifting to the current open / close execution mode is a jackpot (S1701: YES), the process proceeds to step S1702, and the trigger for shifting to the current open / close execution mode is a 2R normal jackpot. It is determined whether or not there is. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the 2R normal jackpot flag stored in the RAM 64 is ON. After executing Step S1702, the process proceeds to Step S1703.

  In step S1703, “3000” (that is, 6.0 sec) is set in the timer counter area To. Thereafter, the opening time setting process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1701 that the trigger for shifting to the current open / close execution mode is not a big hit (S1701: YES), that is, the trigger for shifting to the current open / close execution mode is a small hit, If it is determined in step S1702 that the current transition to the opening / closing execution mode is a 2R normal jackpot (S1702: YES), the process proceeds to step S1704.

  In step S1704, “0” (that is, 0.0 sec) is set in the timer counter area To. That is, when the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is performed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second start opening 34, the lottery result of the big hit lottery executed with the entry as an opportunity is 2R. In general, when it is a big hit or a small hit, the opening effect is not actually performed. After executing step S1704, the opening time setting process is terminated.

<Round number setting process>
Next, the round number setting process will be described. The round number setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 29: S1613) of the gaming state transition process.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the round number setting process. In step S1801, it is determined whether or not the trigger for shifting to the current open / close execution mode is a big hit. Specifically, when any of the jackpot type flags (16R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R normal jackpot flag, 2R normal jackpot flag) stored in the RAM 64 is ON, the current opening / closing execution is performed. It is determined that the trigger for shifting to the mode is a jackpot.

  If it is determined in step S1801 that the trigger for shifting to the current open / close execution mode is a big hit (S1801: YES), the flow proceeds to step S1802, and the trigger for shifting to the current open / close execution mode is a 16R probability change big hit. It is determined whether or not there is. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the 16R probability variation jackpot flag stored in the RAM 64 is ON.

  If it is determined in step S1802 that the current transition to the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by 16R probability variation (S1802: YES), the process proceeds to step S1803, and “16” is set in the first round counter area RC1. . Thereafter, the round number setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1802 that the current transition to the opening / closing execution mode is not the 16R probability variation big hit (S1802: NO), the process proceeds to step S1804, and the current transition to the opening / closing execution mode is triggered. It is determined whether the 8R probability variation jackpot or the 8R normal jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether the 8R probability variable jackpot flag or the 8R normal jackpot flag stored in the RAM 64 is ON.

  If it is determined in step S1804 that the current transition to the opening / closing execution mode is the 8R probability variation big hit or the 8R normal big hit (S1804: YES), the process proceeds to step S1805, and “8” is set in the first round counter area RC1. "Is set. Thereafter, the round number setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1804 that the current transition to the opening / closing execution mode is not the 8R probability variation big hit or the 8R normal big hit (S1804: NO), that is, the current transition to the opening / closing execution mode is 2R. If it is a normal big hit, the process proceeds to step S1806, and "2" is set in the first round counter area RC1. Thereafter, the round number setting process is terminated.

  In step S1801, when it is determined that the trigger for shifting to the current opening / closing execution mode is not a big hit (S1801: YES), that is, the opening / closing execution mode for this time triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second start port 34. If the lottery result of the big hit lottery executed with the entry as a trigger is a small win, the process proceeds to step S1807 and “1” is set in the first round counter area RC1. Set. Thereafter, the round number setting process is terminated.

<Big prize opening and closing process>
Next, the prize winning opening / closing process will be described. The big prize opening / closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 29: 1616) of the game state transition process.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the special prize opening / closing process. In step S1901, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening 36a is being opened. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the variable prize driving unit 36c. If it is determined in step S1901 that the special winning opening 36a is not open (S1901: NO), the process proceeds to step S1902, and it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”. . If it is determined in step S1902 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” (S1902: YES), the big prize opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1902 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not “0” (S1902: NO), the process proceeds to step S1903.

  In step S1903, it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter area T1 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is “0”. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a counter for measuring the remaining time of the closing time of the special winning opening 36a. The value set in the first timer counter area T1 is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, every 2 msec.

  If it is determined in step S1903 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not “0” (S1903: NO), the big prize opening opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1903 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is “0” (S1903: YES), the process proceeds to step S1904, and the variable prize driving unit for opening the big prize opening 36a. Let 36c be a driving state. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1905.

  In step S1905, the entrance counter setting process is executed. In the entry counter setting process, the entry counter area PC provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is set to a value that permits entry of a game ball during one open (one round) of the big winning opening 36a. set. Details of the entrance counter setting process will be described later. After executing Step S1905, the process proceeds to Step S1906.

  In step S1906, an opening limit time setting process is executed. In the opening limit time setting process, an opening limit time that is a limit of one opening time of the special winning opening 36a is set. Specifically, a value corresponding to the opening limit time is set in the first timer counter area T1. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a counter for measuring the remaining time of the open limit time of the special winning opening 36a. As described above, the value set in the first timer counter area T1 is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, every 2 msec. Details of the opening limit time setting process will be described later. After executing Step S1906, the process proceeds to Step S1907.

  In step S1907, a release command is set. Thereafter, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. The release command is a command including information for causing the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 as the sub-side control devices to recognize that the opening of the special winning opening 36a is started. It is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by command output processing (FIG. 17: step S402). The sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening of the large winning opening 36a for one round has been started based on the received opening command, and displays the effect contents on the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 as the large winning opening 36a. Is updated to the content corresponding to the start of the release of. The sound emission control device 90 transmits the release command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. Based on the received opening command, the display control device 100 recognizes that the opening of the large winning opening 36a for one round has started, and displays the effect contents on the liquid crystal display device 41 by opening the large winning opening 36a. Update to the content corresponding to the start.

  If it is determined in step S1901 that the special winning opening 36a is open (step S1901: YES), the process proceeds to step S1908, where it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter area T1 is “0”. To do. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a counter for measuring the remaining time of the open limit time of the special winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S1908 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not “0” (S1908: NO), the process proceeds to step S1909.

  In step S1909, it is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable winning device 36 whether or not a game ball has entered the special winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S1909 that no game ball has been entered (S1909: NO), the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1909 that a game ball has entered (S1909: YES), the process proceeds to step S1910, and the value of the entrance counter area PC is decremented by one. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1911.

  In step S1911, it is determined whether or not the value of the entrance counter area PC is “0”. In step S1911, when it is determined that the value of the winning counter area PC is not "0" (S1911: NO), the main prize winning opening / closing process is ended as it is.

  When it is determined in step S1908 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is “0” (S1908: YES), or when it is determined that the value of the entrance counter area PC is “0” in step S1911. (S1911: YES), the process proceeds to step S1912, and a special winning opening closing process is executed. Specifically, in order to close the special winning opening 36a, the variable winning drive unit 36c is set in a non-driven state. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1913.

  In step S1913, 1 is subtracted from the value of the first round counter area RC1. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1914, and it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”. If it is determined in step S1914 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” (S1914: YES), the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1914 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not “0” (S1914: NO), the process proceeds to step S1915.

  In step S1915, a closing time setting process is executed. The closing time setting process is a process for setting the closing time of the special winning opening 36a. Specifically, a value corresponding to the closing time is set in the first timer counter area T1. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a counter for measuring the remaining time of the closing time of the special winning opening 36a. In the present embodiment, “1000” (2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. After executing Step S1915, the process proceeds to Step S1916.

  In step S1916, a close command is set. Thereafter, the special prize opening / closing process is terminated. The close command is a command including information for causing the audio light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 which are the control devices on the sub side to recognize that the opening of the special winning opening 36a has been completed. In the output process (FIG. 17: step S402), the data is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. Based on the received closing command, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening of the large winning opening 36a for one round has been completed, and displays the contents of the effects on the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 at the large winning opening 36a. Update to the content corresponding to the end of opening. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the close command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 100 recognizes that the opening of the large winning opening 36a for one round has been completed based on the received closing command, and displays the contents of the effect on the liquid crystal display device 41 for the opening of the large winning opening 36a. Update to the content corresponding to what you did.

<Entry counter setting process>
Next, the entrance counter setting process will be described. The winning counter setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine for the big prize opening / closing process (FIG. 31: S1905).

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the entrance counter setting process. In step S2001, it is determined whether or not the trigger for shifting to the current opening / closing execution mode is a big hit. Specifically, when any of the jackpot type flags (16R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R normal jackpot flag, 2R normal jackpot flag) stored in the RAM 64 is ON, the current opening / closing execution is performed. It is determined that the trigger for shifting to the mode is a jackpot.

  If it is determined in step S2001 that the trigger for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode is a big hit (S2001: YES), the process proceeds to step S2002, and the trigger for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode is a 2R normal jackpot. It is determined whether or not there is. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the 2R normal jackpot flag stored in the RAM 64 is ON.

  In step S2002, when it is determined that the trigger for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode this time is not 2R normal big hit (S2002: NO), the process proceeds to step S2003, and “10” is set in the entrance counter area PC. Thereafter, the present ball counter setting process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S2001 that the trigger for the current opening / closing execution mode is not a big hit (S2001: NO), or in step S2002, the trigger for the current opening / closing execution mode is a 2R normal jackpot When it determines (S2002: YES), it progresses to step S2004 and sets "6" to the entrance counter area PC. That is, the current entry counter setting process is executed when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, and the lottery result of the big hit lottery executed using the entry is 2R normal. If it is a big win or a small win, “6” is set in the entrance counter area PC. Thereafter, the present ball counter setting process is terminated.

<Open limit time setting process>
Next, the opening limit time setting process setting process will be described. The opening limit time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a sub-routine (FIG. 32: S1906) of the special winning opening / closing process.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the opening limit time setting process. In step S2101, it is determined whether or not the current transition to the opening / closing execution mode is a big hit. Specifically, when any of the jackpot type flags (16R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R normal jackpot flag, 2R normal jackpot flag) stored in the RAM 64 is ON, the current opening / closing execution is performed. It is determined that the trigger for shifting to the mode is a jackpot.

  In step S2101, if it is determined that the trigger for the current opening / closing execution mode is a big hit (S2101: YES), the process proceeds to step S2102, and the trigger for the current opening / closing execution mode is a 2R normal jackpot. It is determined whether or not there is. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the 2R normal jackpot flag stored in the RAM 64 is ON.

  In step S2102, if it is determined that the trigger for the current opening / closing execution mode is not the 2R normal big hit (S2102: NO), the process proceeds to step S2103, and the first timer counter area T1 is set to “15000” (ie, 30.0 sec) is set. Thereafter, the opening limit time setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2101 that the trigger for shifting to the current open / close execution mode is not a big hit (S2101: NO), or the trigger for shifting to the current open / close execution mode is 2R normal big hit in step S2102. (S2102: YES), the process proceeds to step S2104, and “100” (0.2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. That is, when the opening limit time setting process this time is executed when a game ball enters the second start port 34, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery executed using that ball as a trigger is 2R normal. In the case of big hit or small hit, “100” (0.2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. Thereafter, the opening limit time setting process is terminated.

<Ending time setting process>
Next, the ending time setting process will be described. The ending time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 29: S1620) of the game state transition process.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the ending time setting process. In step S2201, it is determined whether or not the trigger for shifting to the current opening / closing execution mode is a big hit. Specifically, when any of the jackpot type flags (16R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R normal jackpot flag, 2R normal jackpot flag) stored in the RAM 64 is ON, the current opening / closing execution is performed. It is determined that the trigger for shifting to the mode is a jackpot.

  If it is determined in step S2201 that the trigger for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode is a big hit (S2201: YES), the process proceeds to step S2202, and the trigger for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode is a 2R normal jackpot. It is determined whether or not there is. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the 2R normal jackpot flag stored in the RAM 64 is ON.

  If it is determined in step S2202 that the current transition to the opening / closing execution mode is not the 2R normal big hit (S2202: NO), the process proceeds to step S2203, and “3000” (ie, 6 .. 0 sec) is set. Thereafter, the ending time setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2201 that the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is not a big hit (S2201: NO), or in step S2202, it is determined that the trigger for shifting to the current opening / closing execution mode is a 2R normal jackpot. If YES (S2202: YES), the process proceeds to step S2204, and “0” (0.0 sec) is set in the timer counter area Te. That is, when the ending time setting process of this time is executed when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, the lottery result of the big win lottery executed using the incoming ball as a trigger is 2R normal jackpot In the case of small hit, “0” (0.0 sec) is set in the timer counter area Te. Thereafter, the ending time setting process is terminated.

<Transition process at the end of the ending period>
Next, the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 29: S1626).

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the transition process at the end of the ending period. In step S2301, it is determined whether or not the current transition to the opening / closing execution mode is a big hit. Specifically, when any of the big hit type flags (16R probability variable big hit flag, 8R certain variable big hit flag, 8R normal big hit flag, 2R normal big hit flag) stored in the RAM 64 is ON, the current opening / closing execution is performed. It is determined that the trigger for shifting to the mode is a jackpot.

  If it is determined in step S2301 that the trigger for shifting to the current open / close execution mode is a jackpot (S2301: YES), the process proceeds to step S2302, and the trigger for shifting to the current open / close execution mode is a promising jackpot. It is determined whether or not. Specifically, when either the 16R probability variation jackpot flag or the 8R probability variation jackpot flag stored in the RAM 64 is ON, it is determined that the trigger for shifting to the current open / close execution mode is the probability variation jackpot.

  If it is determined in step S2302 that the current transition to the opening / closing execution mode is a probable big hit (S2302: YES), the process proceeds to step S2303. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2302 that the current transition to the opening / closing execution mode is not a probable big hit (S2302: NO), the process proceeds to step S2307.

  In step S2303, the corresponding probability variation jackpot flag is turned OFF. Specifically, a process of turning off an ON flag of the 16R probability variation jackpot flag and the 8R probability variation flag is executed. After executing Step S2303, the process proceeds to Step S2304.

  In step S2304, the high probability mode flag stored in the RAM 64 is turned ON. As a result, after the opening / closing execution mode is ended, the winning / losing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. After executing Step S2304, the process proceeds to Step S2305.

  In step S2305, the high probability mode command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. The high probability mode command is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode. After executing Step S2305, the process proceeds to Step S2306.

  In step S2306, the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the transition process at the end of the ending period is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2302 that the current transition to the opening / closing execution mode is not a probable big hit (S2302: NO), the process proceeds to step S2307, and the corresponding normal big hit flag is turned OFF. Specifically, a process of turning OFF the ON flag of the 8R normal jackpot flag and the 2R normal jackpot flag is executed. After executing step S2307, the process proceeds to step S2308.

  In step S2308, the high probability mode flag is turned OFF. As a result, after the opening / closing execution mode is ended, the winning / losing lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode. After executing Step S2308, the process proceeds to Step S2309.

  In step S 2309, the low probability mode command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. The low-probability mode command is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the success / failure lottery mode is the low-probability mode. After executing Step S2309, the process proceeds to Step S2310.

  In step S2310, the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2311, and 100 is set as a counter value in the game number counter PNC. After executing step S2311, the transition process at the end of the ending period is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2301 that the trigger for shifting to the current open / close execution mode is not a big hit (S2301: NO), that is, if the trigger for shifting to the current open / close execution mode is a small hit, step In step S2312, the small hit flag is turned OFF. After executing step S2312, the transition process at the end of the ending period ends.

<Telephone support processing>
Next, the power combination support process will be described. The electric utility support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of a normal process (FIG. 17: S407).

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the power combination support process. In step S2401, it is determined whether support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supporting flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The in-support flag is a flag that is turned on when the electric accessory 44a of the first right starting port 44 is opened and turned off when the electric accessory 44a is returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step S2401 that the supporting flag is not ON (S2401: NO), the process proceeds to step S2402.

  In step S2402, it is determined whether the support winning flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is set to ON when the electrified winning combination lottery of whether or not the electric accessory 44a is to be opened is turned ON, and is turned OFF when the supporting flag is ON. It is. If it is determined in step S2402 that the support winning flag is not ON (S2402: NO), the process proceeds to step S2403.

  In step S2403, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general map unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, every 2 msec.

  If it is determined in step S2403 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (S2403: NO), the main role support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S2403: YES), the process proceeds to step S2404.

  In step S2404, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the symbol variation display in the normal unit 38. In step S2404, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the variable display (S2404: YES), the process proceeds to step S2405, and after setting the off display, the main role support process is terminated. By setting the out-of-display, the symbol change display in the general-purpose unit 38 is terminated in a state where the out-of-display is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2404 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (S2404: NO), the process proceeds to step S2406.

  In step S2406, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory reservation number SN is greater than “0”. If it is determined in step S2406 that the value of the number of reserved items SN is “0” (S2406: NO), the main role support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2406 that the value of the reserved item SN is larger than “0” (S2406: YES), the process proceeds to step S2407.

  In step S2407, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress, and then the process proceeds to step S2408 to determine whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode. If it is not the opening / closing execution mode in step S2407 (S2407: NO), and if it is the high-frequency support mode in step S2408 (S2408: YES), the process proceeds to step S2409, and the electric-powered object opening lottery is performed. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric utility reservation area 64d is shifted and the value of the electric utility release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric appliance release lottery is performed. Winning. Further, “750” (that is, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 simultaneously with the lottery for opening the electric accessory. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2410.

  In step S2410, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory release lottery in step S2409 is a support win. In step S2410, when it is determined that the result of the electric equipment release lottery is support winning (S2410: YES), the process proceeds to step S2411, the support winning flag is set to ON, and provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Then, “3” is set in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times that the electric accessory 44a is opened. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2412. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2410 that the result of the electric-powered object opening lottery is not support winning (S2410: NO), the process proceeds to step S2412 without executing the process of step S2411.

  In step S2412, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the low probability mode. If it is determined in step S2412 that the success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode (S2412: YES), the process proceeds to step S2413. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2412 that the success / failure lottery mode is not the low probability mode (S2412: NO), the main role support process is terminated as it is.

  In step S2413, it is determined whether or not the game number counter area is “0”. The game number counter is decremented by 1 every time one game time is completed in the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. If it is determined in step S2413 that the game number counter area is not “0” (S2413: NO), the main role support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2413 that the game number counter area is “0”, the process proceeds to step S2414, and the high-frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2415.

  In step S2415, the low-frequency support command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. To do. Thereafter, the electronic role support process is terminated.

  The low frequency support command set in step S2415 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 17: step S402) of the normal process. The voice light emission control device 90 specifies that the support mode is the low frequency support mode based on the reception of the low frequency support command, and executes processing corresponding to the support mode.

  If it is determined in step S2407 that the opening / closing execution mode is selected (S2407: YES), or if it is determined in step S2408 that the mode is not the high-frequency support mode (S2408: NO), the process proceeds to step S2416, and the electric equipment release lottery I do. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric utility reservation area 64d is shifted and the value of the electric utility release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric appliance release lottery is performed. Winning. Also, “14750” (that is, 29.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electrification opening lottery. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2417.

  In step S2417, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory release lottery in step S2416 is a support win. If it is determined in step S2417 that the support is not won (S2417: NO), the main role support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2417 that the support win is selected (S2417: YES), the process proceeds to step S2418, the support win flag is turned ON, and “1” is set in the second round counter area RC2. Then, the main power support process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S2402 that the support winning flag is ON (S2402: YES), the process proceeds to step S2419, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general map unit 38. If it is determined in step S2419 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (S2419: NO), since the variation display of the pattern in the normal unit 38 is being performed, the main role support process is continued. Exit. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2419 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S2419: YES), the process proceeds to step S2420.

  In step S2420, a win display is set. Thereby, the variation display of the pattern in the general map unit 38 is terminated in a state where the hit display is stopped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2421, where the supporting flag is turned ON and the support winning flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the main role support processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2401 that the supporting flag is ON (S2401: YES), the process advances to step S2422 to execute an electrical combination opening / closing process for controlling opening / closing of the electrical combination 44a. Thereafter, the main role support processing is terminated.

<Electrical opening and closing process>
Next, the electric role opening / closing process will be described. The power combination opening / closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine for the power combination support process (FIG. 37: S2422).

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the power combination opening / closing process. In step S2501, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 44a is being opened. Whether or not the electric accessory 44a is being opened is determined based on whether or not the electric accessory driving unit 44b is in a driving state. If it is determined that the electric accessory 44a is opened (S2501: YES), the process proceeds to step S2502.

  In step S2502, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 44a. If it is determined in step S2502 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (S2502: NO), the main utility opening / closing process is terminated. That is, when the opening duration time of the electric utility item 44a has not ended, the main electric character opening / closing process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S2502 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S2502: YES), the process proceeds to step S2503, and a closing process for controlling the electric accessory 44a to a closed state is performed. “250” (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as the means for measuring the duration of opening of the electric accessory 44a is “0”, the electric accessory 44a is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is now electrically operated. As a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the accessory 44a, “250” is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step S2503, the process proceeds to step S2504.

  In step S2504, after 1 is subtracted from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step S2505, where it is determined whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. If it is determined in step S2505 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not “0” (S2505: NO), the main role opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2505 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0” (S2505: YES), the process proceeds to step S2506, and the supporting flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the main role opening / closing process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2501 that the electric accessory 44a is not open (S2501: NO), the process proceeds to step S2507, and it is determined whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the electric accessory 44a. If it is determined in step S2507 that the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (S2507: NO), the main utility opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2507 that the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S2507: YES), the process proceeds to step S2508 to execute an opening process for controlling the electric accessory 44a to the opened state. . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2509.

  In step S2509, it is determined whether or not it is in the opening / closing execution mode. If it is determined that it is not in the opening / closing execution mode (S2509: NO), the process proceeds to step S2510, and it is determined whether or not it is the high-frequency support mode. To do.

  If it is determined in step S2510 that the high-frequency support mode is in effect (S2510: YES), the process proceeds to step S2511 to set “800” (that is, 1.6 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the main role opening / closing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2509 that the mode is the opening / closing execution mode (S2509: YES), or if it is determined in step S2510 that the mode is not the high-frequency support mode (S2510: NO), the process proceeds to step S2512. “100” (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the main role opening / closing process is terminated.

<Game ball launch control processing>
Next, the game ball launch control process will be described. The game ball launch control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 17: S408) of the normal process.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a game ball launch control process. In step S2601, it is determined whether or not the touch sensor 25a is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the player is touching the operation handle 25. If it is determined in step S2601 that the touch sensor 25a is ON (S2601: YES), the process proceeds to step S2602. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2601 that the touch sensor 25a is not ON (S2601: NO), the game ball launch control process is terminated.

  In step S2602, it is determined whether or not the game ball launch button 26 is ON. If it is determined in step S2602 that the game ball launch button 26 is not ON (S2602: NO), the process proceeds to step S2603.

  In step S2603, it is determined whether or not the operation handle 25 is at the origin position. That is, it is determined whether or not the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 25 is zero. If it is determined in step S2603 that the operation handle 25 is at the origin position (S2603: YES), the game ball launch control process is terminated. If it is determined in step S2603 that the operation handle 25 is not at the origin position (S2603: NO), the process proceeds to step S2604.

  In step S2604, it is determined whether or not the wait button 25b is ON. If it is determined in step S2604 that the wait button is ON (S2604: YES), the game ball launch control process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2604 that the wait button is not ON (S2604: NO), the process proceeds to step S2605.

  In step S2605, a control signal is transmitted to the launch control device 80 so as to launch a game ball with a launch intensity corresponding to the displacement amount (rotation operation amount) of the operation handle 25. The launch control device 80 launches a game ball to the game area PA with a launch intensity corresponding to the control signal received from the main MPU 62. After executing Step S2605, the game ball launch control process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2602 that the game ball launch button 26 is ON (S2602: YES), the process proceeds to step S2606. In step S2606, a control signal is transmitted to the launch control device 80 so as to launch the game ball with the right-handed launch intensity. In the present embodiment, a control signal is transmitted to the launch control device 80 so as to launch a game ball with the same launch strength as that when the operation amount of the operation handle 25 is maximum. The launch control device 80 launches a game ball to the game area PA with a launch intensity corresponding to the control signal received from the main MPU 62. Thereafter, the game ball launch control process is terminated.

A5. Electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

  FIG. 40 is a block diagram illustrating mainly the electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. A part of the configuration of the power supply device 85 and the like is omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on an audio emission control board 91 provided in the audio emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is an element including a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like.

  The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like are provided in part of the ROM 93 area.

  The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. For example, various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like are provided in part of the RAM 94 area. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be made into a chip individually.

  The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. A main controller 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main controller 60. On the output side of the MPU 92, an effect operation button 24, a speaker 46, and various lamps 47 are connected, and a display control device 100 is connected.

  A display control board 101 provided in the display control apparatus 100 includes an MPU 102 which is a chip in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 102, and each may be made into a chip individually.

  The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 105). .

  The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for background images.

  The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

  The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the liquid crystal display device 41. Since the VDP 105 is an IC chip, it is also referred to as a “drawing chip”, and is a kind of microcomputer chip that incorporates firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads out image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and causes the liquid crystal display device 41 to display it.

  The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table that is referred to when determining the expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store the image data and the like in a shared manner with each character ROM 106. Further, it is possible to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 in the character ROM 106.

  The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and the display content of the liquid crystal display device 41 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 62, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main side MPU 62, the main side ROM 63, and the main side RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90 are respectively referred to as the sound light side MPU 92 and sound light side. The ROM 93 and the sound light side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 is also called the display side MPU 102.

A6. Various processes executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device:
Next, an example of specific control executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device will be described. The process executed in the sound emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the process executed in the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processes executed in the sound emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing executed by the sound light side MPU 92 will be described.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a timer interruption process executed in the sound light side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed at a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 msec). Hereinafter, the process of each step executed in the timer interrupt process will be described.

  In step S2701, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main MPU 62. The sound light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling the command received from the main MPU 62 to be stored and read out. The commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. Are sequentially read according to the stored order. After executing step S2701, the process proceeds to step S2702.

  In step S2702, a command corresponding process for performing a process corresponding to the received command is executed. Details of the command response processing will be described later. After executing step S2702, the process proceeds to step S2703.

  In step S2703, the light emission control process for performing light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed. In the light emission control process, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read in the command corresponding process in step S2702. After executing step S2703, the process proceeds to step S2704.

  In step S2704, an audio output control process for performing audio output control of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, the audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio output data read in the command corresponding process in step S2702. After executing step S2704, the timer interruption process is terminated.

<Command processing>
Next, command response processing will be described. The command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 41: S2702).

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing command response processing. As described above, in the command handling process, a process corresponding to the command received from the main MPU 62 is executed. Hereinafter, processing of each step executed in the command corresponding processing will be described.

  In step S2801, it is determined whether or not a hold command is received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S2801 that a hold command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S2801: YES), the process proceeds to step S2402, and a hold command handling process is executed. In the hold command handling process, based on the received hold command, the hold information acquired based on the game ball entering the first start port (the first start port 33 on the center side or the first start port 44 on the right side) is stored. A command for controlling the display mode of the first hold display area Ds1 displayed on the display surface 41a of the liquid crystal display device 41 is transmitted to the display side MPU 102 while grasping the number and the determination result of the destination determination process. Details of the pending command handling process will be described later. After executing step S2802, the process proceeds to step S2803. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2801 that a hold command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S2801: NO), the process proceeds to step S2803 without executing step S2802.

  In step S2803, it is determined whether or not the first variation command and the first type command are received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S2803 that the first variation command and the first type command are received from the main MPU 62 (S2803: YES), the process proceeds to step S2804, and the first start port command response process is executed. To do. Details of the first start port command handling process will be described later. After executing Step S2804, the process proceeds to Step S2805. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2803 that the first variation command and the first type command have not been received from the main MPU 62 (S2803: NO), the process proceeds to step S2805 without executing step S2804.

  In step S2805, it is determined whether the second variation command and the second type command are received from the main MPU 62 or not. If it is determined in step S2805 that the second variation command and the second type command have been received from the main MPU 62 (S2805: YES), the process proceeds to step S2806 to execute the second start port command response process. To do. Details of the second start port command handling process will be described later. After executing Step S2806, the process proceeds to Step S2807. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2805 that the second variation command and the second type command are not received from the main MPU 62 (S2805: NO), the process proceeds to step S2807 without executing step S2806.

  In step S2807, it is determined whether a skip execution command has been received from the main MPU 62 or not. If it is determined in step S2807 that a skip execution command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S2807: YES), the flow proceeds to step S2808, and skip execution command handling processing is executed. Details of the skip execution command response processing will be described later. After executing Step S2808, the process proceeds to Step S2809. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2807 that a skip execution command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S2807: NO), the process proceeds to step S2809 without executing step S2808.

  In step S2809, it is determined whether or not the first skip disable command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S2809 that the first non-skippable command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S2809: YES), the process proceeds to step S2810, and the first skip-capable command handling process is executed. Details of the first skip disable command handling process will be described later. After executing Step S2810, the process proceeds to Step S2811. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2809 that the first non-skippable command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S2809: NO), the process proceeds to step S2811 without executing step S2809.

  In step S2811, it is determined whether or not the second skip disable command is received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S2811 that the second non-skippable command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S2811: YES), the process proceeds to step S2812, and the second non-skippable command handling process is executed. Details of the second skip disable command handling process will be described later. After executing Step S2812, the process proceeds to Step S2813. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2811 that the second non-skippable command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S2811: NO), the process proceeds to step S2813 without executing step S2812.

  In step S2813, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S2813 that an opening command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S2813: YES), the process advances to step S2814 to execute an opening effect setting process. In the opening effect setting process, the jackpot type and opening time included in the opening command received this time are specified, and the contents of the opening effect corresponding to the jackpot type and opening time are set, and A command in which corresponding information is set is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. After executing Step S2814, the process proceeds to Step S2815. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2813 that a hold command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S2813: NO), the process proceeds to step S2815 without executing step S2814.

  In step S2815, it is determined whether an open / close processing command has been received from the main MPU 62 or not. If it is determined in step S2815 that an opening / closing process command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S2815: YES), the process proceeds to step S2816 to execute a round effect setting process. In the round effect setting process, the contents of the effect to be executed during the opening / closing process period are set based on the information on the number of rounds and the jackpot type information included in the opening / closing process command, and information corresponding to the effect contents is set. The transmitted command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. After executing Step S2816, the process proceeds to Step S2817. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2815 that an open / close processing command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S2815: NO), the process proceeds to step S2817 without executing step S2816.

  In step S2817, it is determined whether or not an ending command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S2817 that an ending command has been received (S2817: YES), the process proceeds to step S2818 to execute an ending effect setting process. In the ending effect setting process, based on the information about the ending time included in the ending command received this time, the content of the ending effect in the ending period is set, and a command in which information corresponding to the content of the effect is set is displayed. To the side MPU 102. After executing Step S2818, the process proceeds to Step S2819. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2817 that an ending command has not been received (S2817: NO), the process proceeds to step S2819 without executing step S2818.

  In step S2819, other setting processing is executed. In the other setting process, for example, effect contents corresponding to a high probability mode command, a low probability mode command, an open command, and a close command are set. When the effect operation button 24 is pressed, an effect operation command for recognizing that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. After executing step S2819, the command corresponding process is terminated.

<Processing for pending command>
Next, the pending command handling process will be described. The pending command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission controller 90 as a command handling process subroutine (FIG. 42: S2802).

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the pending command handling process. As described above, the hold command handling process is a process executed when a hold command is received from the main MPU 62. Hereinafter, the process of each step executed in the pending command handling process will be described.

  In step S2901, update processing of the first reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound side RAM 94 is executed. The first holding number counter area indicates the number of pieces of holding information acquired based on the game ball entering the first starting port (the central first starting port 33 or the right first starting port 44). It is a counter area for specifying in. In the update process of the first reserved number counter area, the information in the first reserved number counter area is updated to the information on the number of held items included in the held command that has been read this time. Hereinafter, the number of pieces of holding information acquired based on the game ball entering the first starting port (the central first starting port 33 or the right first starting port 44) is also referred to as “first holding number”. After executing step S2901, the process proceeds to step S2902.

  The reason why the process in step S2901 is performed as described above will be described. In this embodiment, while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, whereas backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90. Not. For this reason, the power supply is turned on in a situation in which the hold information relating to the entry of the game ball into the first start port (the central first start port 33 or the right first start port 44) is stored in the RAM 64 of the main controller 60. When shut off, the main control device 60 stores and holds the hold information, whereas the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the hold information is zero. In this case, if the configuration in which the first hold number counter area is counted up every time a hold command is received in the voice light emission control device 90 is used, the number of hold information actually held in the main control device 60 is stored. Inconveniently, the number of on-hold information grasped in the sound emission control device 90 may not match. On the other hand, as in the above-described embodiment, the main control device 60 transmits a hold command including information on the number of hold, and the voice light emission control device 90 receives the hold command every time it receives the hold command. By adopting a configuration in which the information on the number of reserved items included is set in the first reserved number counter area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above disadvantages.

  In step S2902, a hold display control process is executed. Specifically, the display mode of the first hold display area Ds1 displayed on the display surface 41a of the liquid crystal display device 41 is based on the information on the first hold number included in the hold command and the determination result of the previous determination process. A command for control is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. After executing step S2902, the pending command handling process is terminated.

<Command for first start port command>
Next, the first start port command handling process will be described. The first start port command response process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a command response process subroutine (FIG. 42: S2804).

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the first start port command handling process. As described above, the first start port command corresponding process is a process that is executed when it is determined that the first variation command and the first type command have been received, and the first start port (center side first start This is a process for setting the content of the effect executed at the time of the variable display of the first symbol executed when the game ball enters the mouth 33 or the right first start opening 44). Hereinafter, specific processing of the first start port command response processing will be described.

  In step S3001, the first variation command and the first type command received this time are read, and the information on the presence / absence of jackpot, jackpot type, presence / absence of reach, and variation time is read from the two commands. The read information is stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3002.

  In step S3002, an effect type setting process is executed. In the effect type setting process, the contents of the notice effect and the reach effect in the game times are set based on the information read in step S3001. After executing Step S3002, the process proceeds to Step S3003.

  In step S3003, the liquid crystal symbol setting process to be stopped is executed. In the liquid crystal symbol setting process, if the result of the big game lottery of the current game round is 16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit, and 8R normal big hit, the same symbol combination on the active line L is established. Information corresponding to the result is set as information on the current liquid crystal design. Specifically, when the result of the jackpot lottery of this game round is 16R probability variation jackpot or 8R probability variation jackpot, the same odd symbol combination can be selected as the same symbol combination and the same An even number of symbol combinations may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the selection ratio is the same for the same odd symbol combination and the same even symbol combination, but instead the former is selected over the latter. A configuration with a higher rate may be used, and the latter may have a higher selection rate than the former. Further, the combination of “7” symbols is selected only in the case of 16R probability variation jackpot. Further, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is 8R normal jackpot, the same even symbol combination is selected as the same symbol combination.

  If the result of the big game lottery of the current game round is out of play, the presence / absence of reach is determined from the contents of the first variation command. When it is determined that it corresponds to the occurrence of reach, it corresponds to a stop result in which the same symbol combination is not established on the effective line L and corresponds to the stop result in which the reach symbol combination is established on the effective line L. Information is determined as information of the current stop result. On the other hand, if it is determined that it does not correspond to the occurrence of reach, it is a stop result in which the same symbol combination is not established on the effective line L, and the stop result in which the reach symbol combination is not established on the effective line L. Corresponding information is set as information on the current liquid crystal design. After executing step S3003, the process proceeds to step S3004.

  In step S3004, a process for determining a variation display pattern of the current game time is executed. In this process, information on the variation time of the current game time is specified from the contents of the first variation command received this time, information on the variation time, and information on the liquid crystal pattern identified in step S3003 above. Select the variable display pattern corresponding to the combination. In selecting the variation display pattern, the variation display pattern table stored in the variation display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound light side ROM 93 is referred to. After executing step S3004, the process proceeds to step S3005.

  In step S3005, the information of the effect type, the liquid crystal design, and the variable display pattern set in the current game round is set in the first start opening game round effect command. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3006, and the first start opening game times effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 executes processing for causing the liquid crystal display device 41 to display the content of the effect corresponding to the received first start opening game time effect command. After executing Step S3006, the process proceeds to Step S3007.

  In step S3007, a hold information update process is executed. In the hold information update process, it is determined whether or not the variation command received this time is the first variation command, and if it is determined that the variation command received this time is the first variation command, The information in the first reserved number counter area is updated so that the first reserved number stored in the first reserved number counter area of the optical RAM 94 is decremented by one. After executing step S3007, the first start port command handling process is terminated.

<Second start port command handling process>
Next, the second start port command handling process will be described. The second start port command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a command handling process subroutine (FIG. 42: S2806).

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the second start port command handling process. As described above, the second start port command corresponding process is a process executed when it is determined that the second variation command and the second type command are received, and the game ball to the second start port 34 is processed. It is a process for setting the content of the effect performed at the time of the variable display of the 2nd symbol performed with a pitch. Hereinafter, specific processing of the second start port command response processing will be described.

  In step S3101, the second variation command and the second type command received this time are read out, and information on the presence / absence of jackpot, jackpot type, presence / absence of jackpot, and variation time are read from the two commands. The read information is stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3102.

  In step S3102, the liquid crystal symbol setting process to be stopped is executed. In the liquid crystal symbol setting process, if the result of the big game lottery for the current game round is 2R normal jackpot, the liquid crystal symbol (character) corresponding to 2R normal jackpot is displayed in the second liquid crystal symbol display area 41c. The information corresponding to is set as information on the current liquid crystal symbol. In addition, when the result of the big hit lottery of this game round is a small hit or miss, information corresponding to the liquid crystal symbol (character) corresponding to the small hit or miss is displayed in the second liquid crystal symbol display area 41c. Is set as information on the design for the current liquid crystal. After executing step S3102, the process proceeds to step S3103.

  In step S3103, a process for determining a variation display pattern of the current game time is executed. In this process, the information on the variation time of the current game time is specified from the content of the second variation command received this time, the information on the variation time, and the information on the liquid crystal symbol identified in step S3102 above. Select the variable display pattern corresponding to the combination. In selecting the variation display pattern, the variation display pattern table stored in the variation display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound light side ROM 93 is referred to. After executing Step S3103, the process proceeds to Step S3104.

  In step S3104, the information on the effect type, the liquid crystal design, and the variable display pattern set in the current game round is set in the second game opening stage command. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3105, and the second start opening game times effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 executes processing for causing the liquid crystal display device 41 to display the content of the effect corresponding to the received second start opening game time effect command. After executing step S3105, the second start port command handling process is terminated.

<Skip execution command support processing>
Next, skip execution command handling processing will be described. The skip execution command response process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a command response process subroutine (FIG. 42: S2808).

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing skip execution command response processing. In step S3201, a skip effect is set. Specifically, the skip effect described in FIG. 11A is set as an effect to be executed. After executing Step S3201, the process proceeds to Step S3202.

  In step S3202, a skip effect command is transmitted to display side MPU102. The display-side MPU 102 executes processing for causing the liquid crystal display device 41 to display the content of the effect corresponding to the received skip effect command. After executing step S3202, the skip execution command handling process ends.

<First skip disable command handling process>
Next, the first skip disable command handling process will be described. The first skip disable command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a command handling process subroutine (FIG. 42: S2810).

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the first skip disable command response process. In step S3301, the remaining time information of the variation time of the first symbol during variation display is read. As a specific example using FIG. 12, time information corresponding to a period from time Tm6 when the second symbol variation display starts to time Tm16 when the first symbol variation display ends is read. As an actual process, the remaining time information of the timer counter that counts the variation time tc1, which is the variation time of the first symbol, is read. After executing Step S3301, the process proceeds to Step S3302.

  In step S3302, it is determined whether the remaining time of the variation time of the first symbol is 5 seconds or more. If it is determined in step S3302 that the remaining time of the variation time of the first symbol is 5 seconds or longer (S3302: YES), the process proceeds to step S3303.

  In step S3303, the big hit skip impossible effect is set as an effect to be executed. In the present embodiment, the effect described in FIG. 13A is set as an effect to be executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S 3304, and a big hit skip impossible effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 executes a process of causing the liquid crystal display device 41 to display the content of the effect corresponding to the received jackpot skip-disabled effect command. After executing Step S3303, the first skip disable command handling process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S3302 that the remaining time of the variation time of the first symbol is not 5 seconds or more (S3302: NO), the process proceeds to step S3305.

  In step S3305, the jackpot notification effect is set as an effect to be executed. In the present embodiment, the effect described in FIG. 13B is set as an effect to be executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3306, and a jackpot notification effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 executes processing for causing the liquid crystal display device 41 to display the content of the effect corresponding to the received jackpot notification effect command. After executing step S3306, the first skip disable command handling process is terminated.

<Second skip disable command response processing>
Next, the second skip disable command handling process will be described. The second skip disable command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a command handling process subroutine (FIG. 42: S2812).

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the second skip disable command response process. In step S3401, an off-skip effect at the time of detachment is set as an effect to be executed. In the present embodiment, the effect described in FIG. 13A is set as an effect to be executed. That is, the big hit skip effect set in step S3304 (FIG. 47) and the off-skip non-skip effect set in step S3401 are the same effect. By executing the same non-skippable performance at the time of a big hit and when it is off, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency. After executing step S3401, the process proceeds to step S3402.

  In step S3402, the off-skip effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 executes a process of causing the liquid crystal display device 41 to display the content of the effect corresponding to the received off-skip effect command that is not skipped. After executing step S3402, the second non-skippable command handling process is terminated.

<Various processes executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 will be described.

  The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is mainly executed when a command is received from the main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and the sound emission control device 90. There are a command interrupt process and a V interrupt process executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed.

  The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with command reception and V interrupt signal detection. Note that when the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed simultaneously, the command interrupt process is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute the V interrupt process by quickly reflecting the contents of the command received from the sound emission control device 90.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 will be described.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100. As described above, the main process is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Hereinafter, the process of each step performed in the main process will be described.

  In step S3501, an initial setting process is executed. Specifically, first, the MPU 102 is initialized, and the process of clearing the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. The compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Further, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. In addition, other settings necessary for initialization are performed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3502.

  In step S3502, interrupt permission setting is executed. When the interrupt permission setting is executed, the main process thereafter executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process described below are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process executed every time a command is received from the sound emission control device 90.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100. In step S3601, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read out by a command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, the V interrupt process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 will be described.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process executed when the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 is specified. Execute the display instruction.

  As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, when the MPU 102 executes the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction for the VDP 105 is performed every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image when the image drawing process or the display process has not been completed. It is possible to prevent the image accompanying the new drawing instruction from being developed in the frame buffer area in which the image information therein is stored. Hereinafter, details of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described.

  In step S3701, command response processing is executed. In the command handling process, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt process (FIG. 50) are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when an effect command is stored, image drawing and display control are started so that the effect mode designated by the effect command is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41.

  If the presentation operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is a reception period for pressing the presentation operation button 24. If it is determined that it is the reception period for pressing the presentation operation button 24, the presentation operation is performed. Image rendering and display control are started so that an effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the period for accepting the pressing of the presentation operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

  In the command handling process (S3701), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processes corresponding to all the analyzed commands are executed. The reason for this will be described. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds at which the V interrupt process is executed, and thus it is highly possible that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at a time, it is possible to quickly grasp the aspect of the effect such as the notice effect and the liquid crystal pattern set by the sound emission control device 90, and the effect image corresponding to the effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display. Image rendering can be controlled to be displayed on the device 41.

  In step S3702, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the liquid crystal display device 41 is specified based on the type of the screen to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 set by the command corresponding process (S3701) or the like. . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3703.

  In step S3703, task processing is executed. In the task processing, based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 specified by the display setting processing (S3702), the type of character (sprite, display object) constituting the image is determined. In addition to specifying, for each character (sprite), various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3704.

  In step S3704, a drawing process is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters constituting one frame and parameters necessary for drawing each character determined by the task process (S3703) are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes image drawing processing based on these pieces of information, and also displays the image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt processing on the liquid crystal display device 41 together with the drive signal. The image data is transmitted to the liquid crystal display device 41. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3705, and after executing other processes, the V interrupt process is terminated.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment reduces the variation time of the first symbol to a time shorter than the variation time set in advance, so that the variation time set in advance in a predetermined game time is reduced. When it is long, it is possible to prevent the player from being distracted and bored in the predetermined game times. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the execution of the process of shortening the variation time of the first symbol to a time shorter than the preset variation time is performed by operating the game ball launch button 26 or rotating the operation handle 25. Since the player can intentionally urge the player to enter the game ball into the second start port 34, the player can execute the process of shortening the first symbol variation time at a desired timing. Can be encouraged. For example, when a player feels that he / she can not expect a big hit when recognizing an effect being performed during the first symbol variation display, he / she wants to end the first symbol variation display quickly. It is possible to prompt the execution of the process of reducing the variation time of the first symbol, and to quickly terminate the variation display of the first symbol. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being distracted and bored at each game time, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, since the game ball launch button 26 is provided, an operation to be performed by the player in order to prompt execution of a process of shortening the variation time of the first symbol to a time shorter than a preset variation time. Can be made easier.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the second start port 34 is arranged at a position where the game ball enters when the operation handle 25 is rotated by the player so that the launch strength of the game ball becomes the maximum strength. Therefore, the player can cause the game ball to enter the second start port 34 by the easy operation of the operation handle 25. That is, the player can intentionally enter the game ball into the second start port 34 by an easy turning operation of the operation handle 25. As a result, the variation time of the first symbol is set in advance. The player can intentionally urge the execution of the processing to be shortened to a time shorter than the fluctuation time.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the first symbol and the second symbol are variably displayed, based on the combination of the first symbol to be stopped and the second symbol to be stopped. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the first symbol is shortened to a time shorter than the preset fluctuation time. Therefore, for example, when the player operates the game ball launch button 26 to cause the game ball to enter the second starting port 34 while the first symbol is changing, the first symbol is displayed together with the stop display of the second symbol. The player can predict the combination of the first symbols to be stopped and displayed by recognizing whether or not the symbols are to be stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and gameability different from conventional ones.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8, the second start port success / failure table has a probability of being a big hit or a small hit in both the low probability high / bad probability table. , Higher than the probability of losing. That is, when the second symbol starts to display after the first symbol has started to display the variation, a process of shortening the variation time of the first symbol to a time shorter than the preset variation time is executed. The probability that the second symbol is stopped and displayed in combination is higher than the probability that the second symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination in which the process of reducing the variation time of the first symbol to a time shorter than the preset variation time is not executed. high. Therefore, it is possible to execute a process of shortening the variation time of the first symbol to a time shorter than a preset variation time with a high probability.

  Further, in the present embodiment, there is a so-called hold function for holding a game ball into the game when a game ball enters the second start port 34 during a period in which the second symbol is variably displayed. No. Therefore, it is easy for the player to control the timing for starting the variation display of the second symbol. As a result, the player can easily control the timing for executing the process of shortening the variation time of the first symbol to a time shorter than the preset variation time.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the second symbol in the case of “small hit” in the big hit lottery executed when the game ball enters the second start port 34 is 1 second. The expected value of the variation time of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the expected value of the variation time of the first symbol. Therefore, even when the second symbol starts to be displayed after the first symbol has started to display the variation, the process of shortening the variation time of the first symbol to a time shorter than the preset variation time. Can be executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the second start port 34 is arranged upstream of the first start port (the first start port 33 on the center side, the first start port 44 on the right side) with respect to the direction in which the game ball flows down. Yes. Accordingly, it is possible to enter a state in which a game ball enters the first start port (the first start port 33 on the center side, the first start port 44 on the right side) but does not enter the second start port 34. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally executing the process of shortening the variation time of the first symbol to a time shorter than the variation time set in advance.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation time of the first symbol is shortened to a time shorter than a preset variation time, a stop display that suggests that the first symbol that is variably displayed is stopped and displayed. Since the skip effect is executed as the effect, the player can recognize that the variation time of the first symbol is shortened to a time shorter than the preset variation time.

  Further, in the present embodiment, after the first symbol starts the variable display, the second symbol starts the variable display, and the variation time of the first symbol is shorter than the preset variation time. In the case where the time is not shortened, an effect that cannot be skipped is executed, so that the player can recognize that the variation time of the first symbol is not shortened to a time shorter than a preset variation time.

  Further, in the present embodiment, after the first symbol starts the variable display, the second symbol starts the variable display, and the variation time of the first symbol is shorter than the preset variation time. When the time is not shortened, an effect to be executed is selected according to the remaining time of the variation time of the first symbol. Specifically, as described in step S3302, when the remaining time of the variation time of the first symbol is 5 seconds or more, the big hit skip disable effect is executed, and the remaining variation time of the first symbol is performed. If the time is less than 5 seconds, the jackpot announcement effect is executed, so that the effect corresponding to the timing at which the first symbol is stopped and displayed can be executed, the game can be given inflection, and the player Can give a sense of expectation and urgency.

B. Second embodiment:
Next, a second embodiment will be described. The difference between the second embodiment and the first embodiment is that the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment starts the variable display of the second symbol when the first symbol is variablely displayed. First, when the second symbol is variably displayed, the variation display of the first symbol is not started. About another point, it is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in 1st Embodiment.

  FIG. 52 is a time chart for explaining an example of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. In this example, the case where a game ball enters the second start port 34 before the game ball enters the center side first start port 33 will be described.

  When the player starts operating the operation handle 25 at time Tm1, the game ball is launched into the game area PA by the game ball launch mechanism 81. In this example, the player operates by adjusting the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 25 so that the game ball enters the first start port 33 on the center side.

  Thereafter, the player operates the game ball launch button 26 at time Tm2 before the game ball enters the center-side first starting port 33 by the game ball being fired by operating the operation handle 25. By the operation of the game ball launch button 26 by the player, the game ball enters the second start port 34, and the detection sensor for the second start port detects the entrance of the game ball at time Tm3. Thereafter, a game ball enters the central first start port 33, and at time Tm4, the detection sensor for the first start port detects the entry of the game ball.

  After the game ball enters the second start port 34, the second symbol display unit 37b displays the second symbol in a variable manner from time Tm5 to time Tm6, that is, during the fluctuation time tc1, The second symbol is stopped and displayed. It is assumed that the result of the jackpot lottery executed based on the jackpot random number counter C1 acquired when the game ball enters the second start opening this time is “small hit”.

  At this time, at the time Tm4, the second symbol is detected even though the detection sensor for the first starting port detects the entering of the game ball due to the entering of the game ball into the central first starting port 33. During the variation time tc1 during which the variable symbol is displayed, the first symbol display unit 37a does not start the variable symbol display of the first symbol, and the variable symbol is displayed from time Tm7 after the second symbol is stopped. Start. In this example, it is assumed that the result of the jackpot lottery executed based on the jackpot random number counter C1 acquired when the game ball enters the first start port is “out”. Therefore, at the same time as the first symbol variation display is started, the pachinko machine 10 starts the first symbol effect for detachment.

  If a player who recognizes that the first symbol variation display and the first symbol effect for detachment have started, operates the game ball launch button 26 at time Tm8, the touch sensor 25a is on. As a result, a game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 to the game area PA. When the game ball launched into the game area PA by the player operating the game ball launch button 26 at time Tm8 enters the second start port 34, the detection sensor for the second start port is played at time Tm9. Detects the entry of a sphere. When a game ball enters the second start port 34, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are acquired, and at time Tm10, the second symbol display unit 37b displays the second symbol. Start displaying fluctuations.

  The second symbol display unit 37b displays the second symbol after the second symbol is variably displayed from the time Tm10 to the time Tm11, that is, during the fluctuation time tc4 (1 second in the present embodiment). Stop display.

  At this time, as in the first embodiment, the first symbol of the first symbol display unit 37a that has been variably displayed is the first symbol even though the originally set variation time tc2 has not elapsed. At the timing (time Tm11) when the second symbol of the two symbol display unit 37b displays a stop, the first symbol is shifted from the variable display to the stop display. As a result, the first symbol of the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol of the second symbol display unit 37b are displayed to be stopped almost simultaneously. Then, at time Tm12, the variable winning device opens once, triggered by the fact that the lottery result of the big hit lottery based on the game ball entering the second start port 34 is a small hit.

  Hereinafter, the detail of the specific process which the pachinko machine 10 in 2nd Embodiment performs is demonstrated. In the specific process, the difference from the first embodiment is the content of the process in the first start port variation start process (FIG. 19), and other specific processes are described in the first embodiment. Is the same. Therefore, in the present description, the variation start process for the first start port will be described, and description of other specific processes will be omitted.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process for the first start port in the second embodiment. The variation start process for the first start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game times control process (FIG. 18: S503).

  The difference between the variation start process for the first start port in the second embodiment and the variation start process for the first start port in the first embodiment is different from the variation start process for the first start port in the second embodiment. This is the point that it is determined in step S3802 whether or not the second changing flag is ON. The other processing contents are the same as the processing contents of the variation start process for the first start port in the first embodiment.

  In the variation start process for the first start port in the second embodiment, it is determined in step S3802 whether or not the second variation flag is ON, and if it is determined that the second variation flag is not ON. (S3802: NO) The process proceeds to step S3803, and if it is determined that the second changing flag is ON (S3802: YES), the change starting process for the first start port is ended. In other words, if it is determined that the second variation flag is ON, the first start port variation start processing is performed without executing the processing for starting variation of the first symbol (steps S3803 to S3810). finish.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the first symbol is variably displayed by determining whether or not the second varying flag is ON in step S3802 of the variation start process for the first start port. In this case, the process of not starting the variation display of the first symbol when the variation of the second symbol is started is displayed when the second symbol is variably displayed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the first symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner even though the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Since the first symbol variation display is not started, a game ball enters the first start port (center side first start port 33, right side first start port 44). It is possible to avoid a phenomenon in which a big hit lottery is not performed when a game ball enters. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. This will be specifically described below.

  In the first embodiment and the present embodiment, as can be seen from the process in step S801 of the determination process for the first start opening (FIG. 21), the first start opening after the game ball has entered the second start opening 34. When a game ball enters the game, if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery executed when the game ball enters the second start port 34 is “big hit” or “small hit”, the second hit Since the flag is ON (S801: YES), the process proceeds to step S816, and the stop symbol setting process for removal is executed. Therefore, despite the game balls entering the first start opening, the big hit lottery triggered by the game balls entering the first start opening is not executed.

  In other words, in the first embodiment, when the first symbol starts variable display when the second symbol is variable, the second symbol triggers the second symbol to start variable display. When the lottery result of the jackpot lottery based on the entrance to the start port 34 is “big hit” or “small jackpot”, even if the first symbol starts to be displayed during the variation display of the second symbol. The jackpot lottery based on the ball entering the first start opening that triggered the first symbol to start the variable display is not executed.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the second symbol is variably displayed, the first symbol variation display is not started, so the first start port (center side first start port 33, right side first start port). 44), it is possible to avoid the event that the big hit lottery is not performed in response to the entrance to the first starting port even though the game ball has entered, so that the interest of the game can be improved. .

C. Third embodiment:
Next, a third embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, the first symbol is displayed when the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner, even though the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner when the first symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In the third embodiment, the second symbol display unit 37b stops the display of the second symbol that has been displayed in a variable manner in the third embodiment. Only when the combination is a combination corresponding to “big hit” or “small win” in the big win lottery, the process of not starting the variable display of the first symbol is realized. In this way, the game ball enters the first start port even though the game ball has entered the first start port (center side first start port 33, right side first start port 44). The same effect as in the second embodiment, such as avoiding the event that the big win lottery is not performed at the opportunity, is achieved, and the first symbol variation display is started more frequently than in the second embodiment. can do.

  Hereinafter, the detail of the specific process which the pachinko machine 10 in 3rd Embodiment performs is demonstrated. In the specific process, the difference from the second embodiment is the content of the process in the fluctuation start process for the first start port (FIG. 53), and the other specific processes are the first embodiment. And it is the same as 2nd Embodiment. Therefore, in the present description, the variation start process for the first start port will be described, and description of other specific processes will be omitted.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the variation start process for the first start port in the third embodiment. The variation start process for the first start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game times control process (FIG. 18: S503).

  The difference between the variation start process for the first start port in the third embodiment and the variation start process for the first start port in the second embodiment is the difference in the variation start process for the first start port in the third embodiment. This is the point that it is determined in step S3903 whether or not the second hit flag is ON. The other processing contents are the same as the processing contents of the variation start process for the first start port in the second embodiment.

  In the third embodiment, in step S3902, it is determined whether or not the second changing flag is ON, as in the second embodiment. If it is determined that the second changing flag is not ON (S3902: NO), the process proceeds to step S3904.

  If it is determined in step S3902 that the second changing flag is ON (S3902: YES), the process proceeds to step S3903, where it is determined whether or not the second winning flag is ON. If it is determined that the second winning flag is not ON (S3903: NO), the process proceeds to step S3904.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3903 that the second hit flag is ON (S3903: YES), the first start port variation start process is terminated as it is.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the second variation flag is ON in step S3902 of the first start port variation start process, and step S3903 of the first start port variation start process. In the case where the second symbol is variably displayed by determining whether or not the second winning flag is ON, the second symbol combination that the second symbol display unit 37b stops and displays is displayed. Only when the combination is corresponding to “big hit” or “small win” in the big win lottery, the process of not starting the variable display of the first symbol is realized.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the second symbol is variably displayed, the combination of the second symbols that are stopped and displayed by the second symbol display unit 37b is the “big hit” in the jackpot lottery. ”Or“ small hit ”only, the first symbol variation display is not started, so the game ball is placed in the first start port (the first start port 33 on the center side, the first start port 44 on the right side). In addition to having the same effect as in the second embodiment of avoiding the event that the big hit lottery is not performed in response to the entry of the game ball to the first start opening despite having entered the ball, Compared to the embodiment, it is possible to start the variable display of the first symbol more frequently.

D. Fourth embodiment:
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described. The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment has a configuration for detecting an abnormality or fraud. Specifically, the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 when the player manipulates the operation handle 25 so that the operation amount of the operation handle 25 is maximized, or when the game ball launch button 26 is operated. It is determined whether or not the game ball has normally entered the second start port 34.

  In the present embodiment, on the condition that the non-electrical accessory 34a is in an open state, the player operates the operation handle 25 so that the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 is maximized, or the game ball launch button 26 Is operated, it is determined whether or not the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 has entered the second start port 34 within 2 seconds.

  When the player manipulates the operation handle 25 so as to maximize the amount of rotation, or when the game ball launch button 26 is manipulated, the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 is When an event that has not entered the second start port 34 within 2 seconds occurs five times in succession, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  Further, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred even when the non-electrically-powered article 34a does not shift to the closed state despite the game ball entering the second start port 34.

  By making such a determination, an abnormality such as the presence of a foreign object on the path through which the game ball passes from the game ball launching mechanism 81 to the non-powered accessory 34a passes and the game ball not normally circulating, or the operation handle by the player. 25, when the operation amount of the rotation operation is maximized, or when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the launch control device 80 does not normally control the launch intensity, Although the game ball enters the second start port 34, the non-electrically-powered object 34a does not shift to the closed state and the player becomes illegally advantageous, or the player does not operate the electric ball by any operation. It is possible to detect an illegal act or the like that prevents the accessory 34a from being closed.

  Hereinafter, details of specific processing for detecting the above-described abnormality and fraud will be described. In this description, only processes that are different from the first embodiment will be described, and descriptions of processes that are the same as those in the first embodiment will be omitted.

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing normal processing (main control) executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment. The difference between the normal process in the present embodiment and the normal process in the first embodiment (FIG. 17) is that the game ball launch control process (S4008) executed as a subroutine and the abnormality detection process are newly performed. It has been added. Other processing contents in the normal processing are the same as those in the first embodiment. The abnormality detection process in step S4009 is a process for detecting an abnormality or fraud in the pachinko machine 10 as described above.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a game ball launch control process in the fourth embodiment. The game ball launch control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 55: S4008) of the normal process. The difference between the game ball launch control process in the present embodiment and the game ball launch control process in the first embodiment is that the process in step S4106 and the process in step S4108 are newly added in the present embodiment. That is. Hereinafter, the game ball launch control process in the present embodiment will be described in order from the beginning of the process.

  If it is determined in step S4101 that the touch sensor 25a is ON (S4101: YES), the process proceeds to step S4102. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4101 that the touch sensor 25a is not ON (S4101: NO), the game ball launch control process is terminated.

  In step S4102, it is determined whether or not the game ball launch button 26 is ON. If it is determined in step S4102 that the game ball launch button 26 is not ON (S4102: NO), the process proceeds to step S4103.

  In step S4103, it is determined whether or not the operation handle 25 is at the origin position. That is, it is determined whether or not the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 25 is zero. If it is determined in step S4103 that the operation handle 25 is at the origin position (S4103: YES), the game ball launch control process is terminated. If it is determined in step S4103 that the operation handle 25 is not at the origin position (S4103: NO), the process proceeds to step S4104.

  In step S4104, it is determined whether the wait button 25b is ON. If it is determined in step S4104 that the wait button is ON (S4104: YES), the game ball launch control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4104 that the wait button is not ON (S4104: NO), the process proceeds to step S4105.

  In step S4105, a control signal is transmitted to the firing control device 80 so that the game ball is fired with the firing strength corresponding to the displacement amount (rotation operation amount) of the operation handle 25. The launch control device 80 launches a game ball to the game area PA with a launch intensity corresponding to the control signal received from the main MPU 62. After executing Step S4105, the process proceeds to Step S4106.

  In step S4106, it is determined whether or not the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 25 is the maximum. If it is determined in step S4106 that the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 25 is not the maximum (S4106: NO), this game ball launch control process is terminated. If it is determined in step S4106 that the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 25 is the maximum (S4106: YES), the process proceeds to step S4108.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in 4102 that the game ball launch button 26 is ON (S4102: YES), the process proceeds to step S4107. In step S4107, a control signal is transmitted to the launch control device 80 so as to launch the game ball with the right-handed launch intensity. In the present embodiment, a control signal is transmitted to the launch control device 80 so as to launch a game ball with the same launch strength as that when the operation amount of the operation handle 25 is maximum. The launch control device 80 launches a game ball to the game area PA with a launch intensity corresponding to the control signal received from the main MPU 62. Thereafter, the game ball launch control process is terminated. After executing Step S4107, the process proceeds to Step S4108.

  In step S4108, the maximum firing intensity flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. The maximum firing strength flag is a flag that is turned ON when a control signal is transmitted so as to launch the game ball at the maximum firing strength. After executing Step S4108, the game ball launch control process is terminated.

  Next, the abnormality detection process (main control) will be described.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the abnormality detection process. The abnormality detection process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a normal process subroutine (FIG. 55: S4009). Further, as described above, the abnormality detection process is a process newly added in the fourth embodiment.

  In step S4201, it is determined whether the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 has performed a reset operation for resetting abnormality detection. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a reset button for resetting abnormality detection has been operated by the administrator. If it is determined in step S4201 that the reset operation has not been performed (S4201: NO), the process proceeds to step S4202.

  In step S4202, it is determined whether or not the abnormality detection start flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The abnormality detection start flag is a flag that is turned ON when a game ball is fired from the game ball launching mechanism 81 at the maximum launch intensity. The game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 is input to the second start port 34. It is used to determine whether or not to enter the ball within a predetermined time. If it is determined in step S4202 that the abnormality detection start flag is not ON (S4202: NO), the process proceeds to step S4203.

  In step S4203, it is determined whether or not the non-electrical accessory 34a is in an open state. Specifically, an open state or a closed state of the non-electrically-powered object 34a is detected by an open / close detection sensor provided in the non-electrically-charged object 34a. If it is determined in step S4203 that the non-electrically-powered article 34a is not in an open state (S4203: NO), the abnormality detection process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4203 that the non-electrical accessory 34a is in an open state (S4203: YES), the process proceeds to step S4204.

  In step S4204, it is determined whether or not the maximum firing intensity flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S4204 that the maximum firing intensity flag is not ON (S4204: NO), this abnormality detection process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4204 that the maximum firing intensity flag is ON (S4204: YES), the process proceeds to step S4205.

  In step S 4205, it is detected whether or not a game ball has been launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a launch rail for supplying game balls to the game ball launching mechanism 81. On the launch rail, a launch ball detection sensor for detecting a game ball is provided. The firing ball detection sensor is an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and in a situation where the game ball is held by a holding member that holds the game ball immediately before launching in the game ball launching mechanism 81, the launch ball detection is performed. A HI level signal is output as a signal, and a LOW level signal is output as a shot ball detection signal in a situation where the game ball is not held by the holding member. Therefore, it is possible to specify that the game ball has been supplied on the launch rail and that the supplied game ball has been launched by the shot ball detection sensor. The relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed. Further, the launch ball detection sensor is not limited to an optical sensor, and may be a sensor of another detection method. If it is detected in step S4205 that a game ball is emitted from the game ball launching mechanism 81 (S4205: YES), the process proceeds to step S4206.

  In step S4206, an abnormality detection time setting process is executed. Specifically, 1000 (2.0 sec) is set to the timer counter Td. The abnormality detection time setting process is a process for determining a threshold value (Td) of a required time until a game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 with the maximum launch intensity and enters the second start port 34. In the process described later, when the required time is equal to or greater than the threshold, 1 is added to the value of a detection counter Cd described later. In the present embodiment, 2 seconds is set as the threshold value (Td). That is, when the time required for the game ball to be launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 at the maximum launch intensity and enter the second start port 34 is 2 seconds or more, the value of the detection counter Cd is incremented by one. After executing step S4206, the process proceeds to step S4207.

  In step S4207, the abnormality detection start flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing step S4207, the abnormality detection process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S4202 that the abnormality detection start flag is ON (S4202: YES), the process proceeds to step S4208. In step S4208, it is determined whether or not the timer counter Td is zero. If it is determined in step S4208 that the timer counter Td is not 0 (S4208: NO), the process proceeds to step S4209.

  In step S4209, whether or not a game ball has entered the second start port 34 is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second start port 34. If it is determined in step S4209 that no game ball has entered the second start port 34 (S4209: NO), the abnormality detection process ends. If it is determined in step S4209 that a game ball has entered the second start port 34 (S4209: YES), the process proceeds to step S4210.

  In step S4210, the value of the detection counter Cd is reset to zero. The detection counter Cd is a counter that increments the value by 1 when the time required for the game ball to be launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 at the maximum launch intensity and enter the second start port 34 is 2 seconds or more. . If the time required for the game ball to be launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 with the maximum launch intensity and enter the second start port 34 is less than 2 seconds, the value of the detection counter Cd is reset to zero. After executing Step S4210, the process proceeds to Step S4211.

  In step S4211, it is determined whether or not the non-electric accessory 34a is in a closed state. If it is determined in step S4211 that the non-electrical accessory 34a is in a closed state (S4211: YES), the process proceeds to step S4212.

  In step S4212, the abnormality detection start flag and the maximum intensity firing flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 are turned OFF. After executing step S4212, the abnormality detection process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S4208 that the timer counter Td is 0 (S4208: YES), the process proceeds to step S4213. In step S4213, 1 is added to the value of the detection counter Cd. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4214.

  In step S4214, it is determined whether or not the value of the detection counter Cd is 5. If it is determined in step S4214 that the value of the detection counter Cd is not 5 (S4214: NO), this abnormality detection process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S4211 that the non-electrical accessory 34a is not in a closed state (S4211: NO), or if it is determined in step S4214 that the detection counter Cd is 5 (S4214: YES), step The process proceeds to S4215. That is, when the non-electrically-powered object 34a does not close despite the game ball having entered the second start port 34, or the game ball is fired from the game ball launching mechanism 81 with the maximum launch strength and the second start port If the time required to enter the ball 34 is 2 seconds or more, but has occurred five times in succession, the process proceeds to step S4215.

  In step S4215, an abnormality occurrence command is set. The abnormality occurrence command is a command including information for causing the audio emission control device 90 which is a sub-side control device to recognize that an abnormality has occurred, and is performed by a normal process command output process (FIG. 17: step S402). It is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. After executing Step S4215, the process proceeds to Step S4212, and the abnormality detection start flag and the maximum intensity firing flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 are turned OFF. After executing step S4212, the abnormality detection process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S4201 that the reset operation has been performed (S4201: YES), the process proceeds to step S4216. In step S4216, the value of the detection counter Cd is reset to zero. Thereafter, the abnormality detection process ends.

  Next, command response processing (sound emission control) will be described. The command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 41: S2702).

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing command response processing. The difference between the command handling process in the fourth embodiment and the command handling process in the first embodiment is that step S4319 and step S4320, which are processes related to an abnormal command, are added to the command handling process in the fourth embodiment. Is a point. The other processes in the command response process are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus description thereof is omitted.

  In step S4319, it is determined whether or not an always occurring command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S4319 that an abnormality occurrence command has been received (S4319: YES), the process proceeds to step S4320.

  In step S4320, an abnormality occurrence command response process is executed. Specifically, by operating the various lamps 47, the speaker 46, and the liquid crystal display device 41, it is notified that an abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 10. After executing step S4320, the process proceeds to step S4321, and other setting processing is executed. Thereafter, the command corresponding process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4319 that an abnormality occurrence command has not been received (S4319: NO), the process proceeds to step S4321 without executing step S4320. In the fourth embodiment, the command handling process is executed in this way.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is operated by the player so that the operation amount of the operation handle 25 is maximized, or when the game ball launch button 26 is operated. In addition, when the event that the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 has not entered the second start port 34 within 2 seconds occurs five times, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  Further, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred even when the non-electrically-powered article 34a does not shift to the closed state despite the game ball entering the second start port 34.

  By making such a determination, an abnormality such as the presence of a foreign object on the path through which the game ball passes from the game ball launching mechanism 81 to the non-powered accessory 34a passes and the game ball not normally circulating, or the operation handle by the player. 25, when the operation amount of the rotation operation is maximized, or when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the launch control device 80 does not normally control the launch intensity, Although the game ball enters the second start port 34, the non-electrically-powered object 34a does not shift to the closed state and the player becomes illegally advantageous, or the player does not operate the electric ball by any operation. It is possible to detect an illegal act or the like that prevents the accessory 34a from being closed.

  In the present embodiment, when the player operates the operation handle 25 so that the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 is maximized, or when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game ball launch mechanism 81 It was determined that an abnormality occurred when the fired game ball did not enter the second start port 34 within 2 seconds, and it was determined that an abnormality occurred. It may be determined that an abnormality has occurred when an event in which the game ball does not enter the second start port 34 within 2 seconds occurs once. In this case, fraud and abnormality can be detected at an early stage. Further, the number of continuations of the event that the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 does not enter the second start port 34 within 2 seconds as a threshold for determining occurrence of abnormality is limited to 5 times or 1 time. It can be set to any number without being done.

  The value of the timer counter Td is also 2 seconds in the present embodiment, but other values may be set. For example, in the normal state of the pachinko machine 10, the timer is set based on the maximum value that can be taken as the time required for the game ball to be launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 with the maximum launch intensity and enter the second start port 34. A counter Td can be set.

E. Variations:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented in various modes without departing from the gist thereof. For example, the following modifications are possible.

E1. Modification 1:
In the above embodiment, when a game ball enters the second start port 34 during a period in which the first symbol is variably displayed, the variation time of the first symbol is shortened and the first symbol is stopped and displayed. You may perform the guidance effect which guides that there is possibility. For example, the guidance effect may be executed as a demonstration video that is an effect that is performed during a period when the game is not executed, or may be executed as a game time effect that is executed during the variable display of the first symbol. . By executing such a guidance effect, if a game ball is made to enter the second start port 34 during a period in which the first symbol is variably displayed, the variation time of the first symbol is shortened and the first symbol is changed. It is possible for the player to recognize that there is a possibility that the symbol is stopped and displayed, and to allow the player to recognize the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 at an early stage.

E2. Modification 2:
In the above embodiment, as described in FIG. 9B, the jackpot type based on the game ball entering the second starting port 34 is set to 2R normal jackpot only, but 16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot For example, other jackpot types may be set, or a plurality of types of jackpot types may be set. Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the open / close execution mode of the variable prize winning device 36 in the 2R normal jackpot is the low-frequency winning mode, but it may be set to the high-frequency winning mode or a plurality of types of jackpot types may be set. It is possible to set a combination of the high-frequency winning mode or the low-frequency winning mode for each jackpot type, and to differentiate the degree of advantage for the player for each jackpot type.

E3. Modification 3:
In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4B, the first liquid crystal symbol display area 41b is displayed relatively larger than the second liquid crystal symbol display area 41c. You may employ | adopt the structure from which height changes. For example, when the first symbol and the second symbol are variably displayed at the same time, the size of at least one of the first liquid crystal symbol display area 41b or the second liquid crystal symbol display area 41c is set in each area. You may determine based on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery which the symbol for liquid crystal to display shows. That is, it is determined based on the jackpot random number counter C1 acquired based on the game balls entering the first start port (center side first start port 33, right side first start port 44) and second start port 34. May be.

  More specifically, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery based on the jackpot random number counter C1 acquired based on the game ball entering the first starting port (the central first starting port 33, the right first starting port 44). Is more advantageous to the player than the lottery result of the jackpot lottery based on the jackpot random number counter C1 acquired based on the game ball entering the second start port 34, the first liquid crystal symbol display area 41b is displayed larger than the second liquid crystal symbol display area 41c, and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery based on the jackpot random number counter C1 acquired based on the game ball entering the second start port 34 is the first start port. It is more advantageous for the player than the lottery result of the jackpot lottery based on the jackpot random number counter C1 acquired based on the game ball entering the (first central start port 33, right first start port 44). The case may be a second LCD symbol display areas 41c larger displays than the first LCD symbol display area 41b.

  By doing in this way, for the player who has recognized the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol displayed on the display surface 41a, the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to each symbol and the degree of advantage to the player This makes it possible to give a player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency.

  Also, since the liquid crystal symbol display area corresponding to the jackpot lottery that is advantageous to the player is displayed larger than the other liquid crystal symbol display area, the jackpot lottery that is advantageous to the player is displayed. The design for liquid crystal corresponding to can be noticed, and a sense of expectation can be given. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

E4. Modification 4:
In the first embodiment, as shown in step S801 of the determination process for the first start port (FIG. 21), when the second winning flag is ON (S801: YES), the process proceeds to step S816. As a process of setting the stop symbol of the first symbol, a stop symbol setting process for removal is executed. That is, when the game ball enters the second start port 34 first and then enters the first start port (the first start port 33 on the center side, the first start port 44 on the right side). If the lottery result of the big hit lottery with the game ball entering the second start opening 34 is a big hit or a small win, the first start port (the first start port 33 on the center side, the right side first The determination of success or failure of the big hit lottery triggered by the game ball entering the 1 start opening 44) is not executed, and the stop symbol setting process for losing is executed.

  Therefore, as a modified example, the game ball first enters the second start port 34, and then the game ball enters the first start port (the first start port 33 on the center side and the first start port 44 on the right side). The first start port (the first start port 33 on the center side, the first on the right side) only when the lottery result of the big hit lottery triggered by the game ball entering the second start port 34 is a big hit It is assumed that whether or not the jackpot lottery determination is made is not executed when a game ball enters the start opening 44). That is, when the lottery result of the big hit lottery with the game ball entering the second start opening 34 is a small hit, the first start opening (the first start opening 33 on the center side, the first start opening on the right side) 44) It is assumed that whether or not the jackpot lottery is determined is determined when a game ball enters the ball. Hereinafter, the determination process for the first start port in Modification 4 will be described.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the determination process for the first start port in Modification 4. The difference between the determination process for the first start port in the present modification and the determination process for the first start port in the first embodiment is that the determination process for the first start port in the present modification includes step S801a. Is added. In the determination process for the first start port in the modified example 4, when it is determined in step S801 that the second hit flag is ON (S801: YES), and when the small hit flag is ON (S801a) : YES), the processing after step S802 is executed.

  As described in the first embodiment, the second hit flag is ON when the lottery result of the big hit lottery triggered by the game ball entering the second start port 34 is a big hit or a small hit. It is a flag to become. The small hit flag is a flag that is turned ON when the lottery result of the big hit lottery with the game ball entering the second start port 34 is a small hit.

  Therefore, in the determination process for the first start port in this modification, if the lottery result of the big hit lottery triggered by the game ball entering the second start port 34 is a small hit, the first start It can be configured that whether or not the jackpot lottery determination is performed when a game ball enters the mouth (the first start port 33 on the center side and the first start port 44 on the right side) is executed.

  When the determination process for the first start port in this modification is adopted, the big hit triggered by the game ball entering the first start port (the first start port 33 on the center side and the first start port 44 on the right side) If the lottery result of the lottery is a big hit and the lottery result of the big hit lottery triggered by the game ball entering the second start port 34 is a small hit, the step of the game state transition process (FIG. 29) In S1605, in determining whether or not to switch to the opening / closing execution mode, it is necessary to determine which lottery result triggers the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, for example, it may be determined to shift to the opening / closing execution mode in response to the lottery result of the big hit lottery based on the ball entering the start opening of the one where the change of the symbol ends first. At the same time, the jackpot flag or the jackpot flag based on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery that was not triggered by the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is turned OFF. By doing in this way, the determination process for the 1st start opening in this modification is realizable.

E5. Modification 5:
In the process for setting the variation time for the first start port of the first embodiment (FIG. 22), the first start is performed by executing step S902 and step S904 in determining the variation time of the first symbol. Although determined based on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the game balls entering the mouth (center side first start port 33, right side first start port 44), it is further entered to the second start port 34 The variation time of the first symbol may be determined based on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery with the ball as an opportunity.

  Specifically, a process for determining whether or not the lottery result of the jackpot lottery with a game ball entering the second start port 34 is a big hit, and the game ball entering the second start port 34 In addition to the process of setting the variation time for the first start port, the determination process of whether or not the lottery result of the big hit lottery triggered by the ball is a small win, the first start port (center side first start port 33, Fluctuation time for each combination of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by entering the right first starting port 44) and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by entering the game ball into the second starting port 34) This modification can be realized by setting the table.

E6. Modification 6:
In the first embodiment, the skip command setting process (FIG. 28) is executed by the main MPU 62 of the main control device 60, but may be executed by the sound light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90. In this case, the sound light side MPU 92 may acquire information necessary for the determination processing in step S1501, step S1502, and step S1504 from the main control device 60 and use it for each determination processing. According to such a configuration, a process corresponding to the skip command setting process can be executed in the sound light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90.

E7. Modification 7:
In the above embodiment, the first variation stop processing is the processing mode shown in FIG. 23 and the second variation stop processing is the processing mode shown in FIG. 27, but other processing modes may be adopted as these two processing modes. Good.

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a first variation stop process in the seventh modification. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the second variation stop process in the seventh modification.

  The difference between the first variation stop process in the present modification and the first variation stop process in the first embodiment is that, in the present modification, the process of stopping the variation of the second symbol display unit as step S1011 and step S1012 And a process of turning off the second changing flag is added.

  Further, the difference between the second variation stop process in the present modification and the second variation stop process in the first embodiment is that, in the present modification, the process of stopping the variation of the first symbol display unit as step S1411, In step S1412, a process for turning off the first changing flag is added.

  When such a processing mode is adopted, when executing a process for simultaneously stopping the first symbol and the second symbol, a process for stopping the first symbol and a process for stopping the second symbol are performed. Since the processing is executed as a series of processes in the same thread, the first symbol and the second symbol can be simultaneously stopped with higher accuracy.

E8. Modification 8:
In the first embodiment, the game times control processing is the processing mode shown in FIG. 18, but other processing modes may be adopted as the game times control processing.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing a game times control process according to the eighth modification. In the game turn control process in the modified example 8, the subroutine of the first variation stop process (FIG. 18: S504) and the second change stop process (FIG. 18: S507) executed in the game turn control process of the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 62, a function corresponding to a process consisting of two subroutines, ie, a subroutine, is executed in one subroutine as a change stop process in step S508. In this way, simplification of processing can be realized.

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the change stop process (FIG. 62: S508), which is a subroutine of the game times control process in the present modification. The fluctuation stop process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  In step S4401, it is determined whether the first changing flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the first symbol is in a variable display. If it is determined in step S4401 that the first changing flag is ON (S4401: YES), the process proceeds to step S4402.

  In step S4402, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the first symbol displayed by the first symbol display unit 37a has ended. If it is determined in step S4402 that the variation time of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a has ended (S4402: YES), the process proceeds to step S4403, and the first symbol display unit 37a displays the first symbol. Stops the change of 1 symbol. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4404.

  In step S4404, the first changing flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4405, and it is determined whether or not the first hit flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the first symbol variation display is a jackpot. If it is determined in step S4405 that the first hit flag is ON (S4406: YES), the process proceeds to step S4406.

  In step S4406, the first hit flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4407.

  In step S4407, it is determined whether the second changing flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the second symbol is in a variable display. If it is determined in step S4407 that the second changing flag is ON (S4407: YES), the process proceeds to step S4408. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4407 that the second variation flag is not ON (S4407: NO), the variation stop process is terminated.

  In step S4408, the variation of the second symbol displayed by the second symbol display unit 37b is stopped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4409, and the second changing flag is turned OFF. After executing step S4409, the fluctuation stopping process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4401 that the first changing flag is not ON (S4401: NO), in step S4402, the first symbol changing display time in the first symbol display unit 37a has not ended. If it is determined (S4402: NO), or if it is determined in step S4405 that the first hit flag is not ON (S4405: NO), the process proceeds to step S4410.

  In step S4410, it is determined whether the second changing flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the second symbol is in a variable display. If it is determined in step S4410 that the second changing flag is ON (S4410: YES), the process proceeds to step S4411.

  In step S4411, it is determined whether the variation time of the second symbol displayed by the second symbol display unit 37b has ended. If it is determined in step S4411 that the variation time of the second symbol displayed by the second symbol display unit 37b has ended (S4411: YES), the process proceeds to step S4412, and the second symbol display unit 37b displays the second symbol display unit 37b. Stop the fluctuation of the symbol of 2. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4413.

  In step S4413, the second changing flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4414, and it is determined whether or not the second winning flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the big hit lottery corresponding to the display change of the second symbol is a big hit or a small win. If it is determined in step S4414 that the second winning flag is ON (S4414: YES), the process proceeds to step S4415.

  In step S4415, the second hit flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4416.

  In step S4416, it is determined whether the first changing flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the first symbol is in a variable display. If it is determined in step S4416 that the first changing flag is ON (S4416: YES), the process proceeds to step S4417. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4416 that the first variation flag is not ON (S4416: NO), the variation stop process is terminated.

  In step S4417, the variation of the first symbol displayed by the first symbol display unit 37a is stopped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4418, and the first changing flag is turned OFF. After executing step S4418, the variation stop process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S4410 that the second changing flag is not ON (S4410: NO), it is determined in step S4411 that the second symbol change display time in the second symbol display section 37b has not ended. In this case (S4411: NO), or when it is determined in step S4414 that the second winning flag is not ON (S4414: NO), the variation stop process is terminated.

  In the first embodiment, the first variation stop process includes the determination process for determining whether or not the first symbol variation time ends, and the determination process for determining whether or not the second symbol variation time ends. (FIG. 18: S504) and the second variation stop process (FIG. 18: S507) were executed once each. As in this modification, the subroutine of the first variation stop process (FIG. 18: S504) and the subroutine of the second variation stop process (FIG. 18: S507) executed in the game turn control process of the first embodiment are performed. The determination as to whether or not the variation time of the first symbol executed in each of the first variation stop processing and the second variation stop processing is completed by executing the variation stop processing in one subroutine. It is sufficient to determine whether or not the symbol variation time of 2 is finished once in the variation stop process, and the process can be simplified.

E9. Modification 9:
In the above embodiment, the skip effect and the skip impossible effect are executed, but various other effects may be executed. For example, a skip promotion effect may be executed that prompts the player to enter a game ball into the second start port 34 to shorten the variation time of the first symbol to a time shorter than a preset variation time. .

  FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a skip promotion effect. The skip promotion effect in the present embodiment can shorten the variation time of the first symbol to a time shorter than a preset variation time by displaying the characters “Skip!” On the display surface 41a. It is a production that suggests that there is sex. By executing such an effect, the player is prompted to enter a game ball into the second start port 34 to shorten the variation time of the first symbol to a time shorter than a preset variation time. By executing the skip promotion effect while the display of the first symbol is changed, the game is moved to the second start port 34 by the operation of the game ball launch button 26 or the operation handle 25 with the maximum rotation operation amount. The player can be prompted to enter the ball.

E10. Modification 10:
In the above embodiment, the skip effect and the skip impossible effect are executed, but various other effects may be executed. For example, you may perform the skip suppression effect demonstrated below.

  When the remaining time of the variation time of the first symbol is short, when the player operates the game ball launch button 26, the variation of the second symbol due to the game ball entering the second start port 34 by the operation. There is a possibility that the display and the stop display are executed at the time of the first symbol variation display that is executed next to the first symbol variation display currently in progress. In this case, the variation time for the first symbol variation display that is currently in progress is not executed, but the variation time for the first symbol variation display that is executed next time can be shortened. There is a possibility that the shortening of the variation time of the first symbol may be executed at a timing not intended by the player.

  Therefore, the timing after the first symbol starts to be changed by the game ball entering the first starting port, and the remaining time of the preset variation time of the first symbol is set in advance. It is suggested that it is better not to let the game ball enter the second starting port 34 for the purpose of shortening the variation time of the first symbol to the player at the timing shorter than the time tl as the threshold value. A skip suppression effect that is an effect to be performed may be executed.

  As the time tl set as the threshold value, for example, a jackpot lottery triggered by the game ball entering the second start port 34 from the time when the player operates the game ball launch button 26 (for example, time Tm7 in FIG. 10). Is a small hit and a time length (hereinafter also referred to as time tla) corresponding to the time until the operation of the variable winning device 36 is started (for example, time Tm11 in FIG. 10) can be applied. That is, it is the timing after the first symbol starts to be displayed by the game ball entering the first starting port, and the remaining time of the preset variation time of the first symbol is shorter than the time tla. At that timing, the skip suppression effect is executed.

  FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a skip suppression effect. The skip suppression effect in the present embodiment is an effect that suggests that it is better for a female character not to enter a game ball into the second start opening 34 for the purpose of shortening the variation time of the first symbol.

  In this way, by executing the skip suppression effect, the game ball is inserted into the second start opening 34 during the display of the variation of the first symbol that is currently in progress. It is possible to reduce the variation time for the symbol variation display, and to suppress the variation of the first symbol variation time at a timing not intended by the player.

  In the above description, by executing the skip suppression effect, the player is prevented from entering the game ball at the second start port 34 for the purpose of shortening the variation time of the first symbol. The effect by the skip suppression effect can also be realized by the skip promotion effect described in the modification 9.

  Specifically, the skip promotion effect is repeatedly executed at the timing at which the first symbol starts to change display by the game ball entering the first start port. After that, the skip promotion effect that has been repeatedly executed is stopped at the timing when the remaining time of the preset first symbol variation time becomes shorter than the preset time tl. When the skip promotion effect is repeatedly executed, a game ball is inserted into the second start opening 34 and the first symbol variation time is prompted to be shortened to a time shorter than a preset variation time. Nevertheless, when the execution of the skip promotion effect is suddenly stopped, the player causes the game ball to enter the second start port 34 and the variation time of the first symbol is shorter than the variation time set in advance. I think it is better to stop shortening. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from entering the game ball into the second starting port 34 for the purpose of shortening the variation time of the first symbol, and using the skip promotion effect, Similar effects can be achieved.

  As the time tl set as the threshold, in addition to the above-described tla, the second symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner from the time when the player operates the game ball launch button 26 (for example, time Tm7 in FIG. 10). From the time length up to the time (for example, time Tm9 in FIG. 10) (hereinafter also referred to as time tlb) or the time when the player operates the game ball launch button 26 (for example, time Tm7 in FIG. 10) to the second time. A time length (hereinafter also referred to as time tlc) until a time point (for example, until time Tm8 in FIG. 10) when the detection sensor of the start port 34 detects the entry of a game ball can be applied.

E11. Modification 11:
As explained in Modification 10 above, the skip promotion effect was used in such a manner that the skip promotion effect that was repeatedly executed is stopped when the remaining time of the first symbol variation time becomes shorter than the time tl. In this case, by recognizing that the skip promotion effect that has been repeatedly executed has stopped, the player estimates that the remaining time of the first symbol variation time is short and that the first symbol variation display is almost finished. It becomes like this. By using such a player's psychological change due to execution / stop of the skip promotion effect, the following effects can be executed.

  FIG. 66 is a time chart showing the timing for executing the skip promotion effect in the eleventh modification.

  The pachinko machine 10 is a reach that is executed during the display of the variation of the first symbol, and a super reach that suggests that there is a higher possibility of winning the normal reach production and the big win lottery than when performing the normal reach production. It is possible to execute the production and the special reach production that suggests that the possibility of winning the jackpot lottery is higher than the super reach production. In other words, when the super reach effect is executed after the reach effect, the probability of winning the jackpot lottery is higher than when only the reach effect is executed, and when the special reach effect is executed after the super reach effect. Has a higher probability of winning the jackpot lottery than when only the reach production and the super reach production are executed.

  As shown in FIG. 66, in this modification, a skip promotion effect is repeatedly executed until a predetermined time before the reach effect and the super reach effect that are executed during the first symbol variation display, and each reach effect is displayed. When the remaining time until the end becomes shorter than the time tld, the execution of the skip promotion effect is stopped. Hereinafter, the time chart will be described in time series.

  When the player recognizes that the reach effect has been executed, the player assumes that there is a high possibility of winning the jackpot lottery in the game round and has a sense of expectation. Thereafter, when it is recognized that the skip promotion effect that has been repeatedly executed is stopped during the execution of the reach effect, it is assumed that the variable display of the first symbol is ended. As a result, the player estimates that the first symbol effect does not develop into a super reach effect or a special reach effect. In other words, the player assumes that the possibility of winning the jackpot lottery in the game round is low, and has a feeling of loss and is psychologically discouraged.

  However, after that, when recognizing that the super reach production was executed, the player had guessed that the chance of winning the jackpot lottery in the game round was low, In addition to having a sense of expectation again, we feel unexpectedness, and inflection occurs in our feelings.

  After that, when the super-reach effect is executed and the player has a sense of expectation again, and then, while the spar reach effect is being executed, it is recognized that the skip promotion effect that has been repeatedly executed has stopped. The player again estimates that the first symbol variation display will end. As a result, the player assumes that the first symbol effect will not develop into a special reach effect, and again feels lost and is psychologically discouraged.

  However, after recognizing that the special performance was executed, the player again assumed that the guess was not likely to win the jackpot lottery in the game round, but the guess was overturned again. As a result, there will be further unexpectedness and expectation, and even more emotional inflection will occur. Thereafter, the player knows the lottery result of the big hit lottery in the game round by executing the lottery result announcement effect. In the lottery result announcement effect, a big hit or miss is announced.

  Thus, by devising the execution / stop timing of the skip promotion effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation or a sense of loss, and to give an inflection to the player's feelings. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

E12. Modification 12:
Other configurations may be adopted as the configuration of the game board 30. For example, the arrangement positions of the through gate 35a and the central first start opening 33 are not limited to the arrangement positions shown in FIG.

  FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram showing another example (example 1) as the configuration of the game board 30. In the game board 30 shown in FIG. 67, the center-side first start port 33 is disposed at a position where a game ball that has entered (passed through) the through gate 35a enters. More specifically, the center-side first start port 33 is disposed directly below the through gate 35a.

  With the game board 30 having such a configuration, when the game ball enters the through-gate 35a and then enters the central first start port 33, the non-electrically-operated accessory 34a is opened and the second start port 34 is opened. It becomes possible to enter the game ball into the, and the player can enter the game ball into the second start port 34. As a result, it is possible to realize a game property such that a game ball is made to enter the second start port 34 on condition that the game ball enters the center side first start port 33. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from executing a game mainly for the purpose of causing the game ball to enter the second start port 34 without aiming for the game ball to enter the center first start port 33. can do.

E13. Modification 13:
As the configuration of the game board 30, the following configuration may be adopted in addition to the embodiment and the modified example 12 described above.

  FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram showing another example (example 2) as the configuration of the game board 30. In the gaming board 30 shown in FIG. 68, the through gate 35a is arranged downstream of the right first start port 44. With the game board 30 having such a configuration, the operation of the operation handle 25 or the operation of the game ball launch button 26 is performed so that the game ball always flows on the right side of the game board 30, so that the first start on the central side is performed. It is possible to enter the mouth 33, the through gate 35a, the second starting port 34, the through gate 35b, and the right first starting port 44, and the game can be simplified.

E14. Modification 14:
Furthermore, as a configuration of the game board 30, for example, a distribution mechanism that distributes game balls to the game board 30 may be provided.

  FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration of the game board 30 including the distribution mechanism 150. In the game board 30 shown in FIG. 69, the game balls that have entered the distribution mechanism 150 are distributed alternately to the through gate 35 a and the central first start port 33.

  FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram showing how the distribution mechanism 150 distributes game balls. As shown in FIG. 70 (a), when one game ball PB1 enters the sorting mechanism 150 from the ball entrance portion 151, the game ball PB1 comes into contact with the blade portion 152. By making contact with the game ball PB 1, the blade portion 152 rotates clockwise by a predetermined angle around the shaft portion 153, and distributes the game ball PB 1 to the outgoing ball portion 154. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), the game balls PB 1 distributed to the outgoing ball part 154 exit from the outgoing ball part 154 and enter the central first start port 33. Further, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), unlike the state shown in FIG. 70 (a), the blade portion 152 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (c), when another game ball PB2 enters the sorting mechanism 150 from the ball entrance portion 151 in this state, the game ball PB2 comes into contact with the blade portion 152. By contacting the game ball PB2, the blade portion 152 rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle around the shaft portion 153, and distributes the game ball PB2 to the outgoing ball portion 155. After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (d), the game balls PB2 distributed to the outgoing ball part 155 go out from the outgoing ball part 155 and enter the through gate 35a. Further, as shown in FIG. 70 (d), the blade portion 152 returns to the state of FIG. 70 (a). As described above, the distribution mechanism 150 repeats the operations shown in FIGS. 70A to 70D so that the game balls that have entered from the entrance portion 151 are transferred to the through gate 35a, the central first start port 33, and the like. Sort alternately.

  By configuring the game board 30 in such a configuration, the player can enter the through gate 35a and the central first start port 33 by entering the game ball into the distribution mechanism 150, As a result, the game ball can enter the second start port 34. In other words, it is possible to realize a game property such that a game ball enters the second start port 34 on condition that the game ball enters the center side first start port 33. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from executing a game mainly for the purpose of causing the game ball to enter the second start port 34 without aiming for the game ball to enter the center first start port 33. can do.

E15. Modification 15:
As a configuration of the game board 30, a game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 cannot be reached when the operation handle 25 is operated, and a game ball is played when the game ball launch button 26 is operated. The specific area SPA that can be reached by the game ball launched from the launch mechanism 81 may be included in the game area PA.

  FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the configuration of the game board 30 in the modification 15. In FIG. 71, when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the trajectory Tr1 through which the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 circulates in the game area PA and the operation handle 25 are operated with the maximum rotation operation amount. In this case, the trajectory Tr2 through which the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 circulates in the game area PA is shown. As shown in the drawing, the trajectory Tr1 is located above the game area PA from the trajectory Tr2. The specific area SPA described above refers to an area that includes the locus Tr1 but does not include the locus Tr2. The pachinko machine 10 in this modification is configured to include such a specific area SPA in the game area PA.

  In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present modification, the launch intensity of the game ball launched by the game ball launch mechanism 81 when the game ball launch button 26 is operated depends on the operation handle 25 being operated. This is the launch strength of a game ball that the game ball launching mechanism 81 cannot launch. More specifically, the launch intensity of the game ball launched by the game ball launch mechanism 81 when the game ball launch button 26 is operated is that the game ball launch mechanism 81 is fired when the operation handle 25 is operated. It is larger than the maximum launch strength of a game ball that can be.

  Furthermore, in this modification, as shown in the figure, the second start port 34 and the non-electrically-powered accessory 34a are provided in the specific area SPA. That is, the game ball launched by the game ball launching mechanism 81 by operating the game ball launch button 26 can enter the second starting port 34, but the game handle launching mechanism can be operated by operating the operation handle 25. The game ball launched by 81 cannot enter the second start port 34.

  By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to create a new gameability that the operation of the game ball launch button 26 is essential in order to allow the game ball to enter the second start port 34. More specifically, the variation time of the first symbol is shortened to a time shorter than a preset variation time by causing a game ball to enter the second start port 34 while the first symbol is varying. For this purpose, it is possible to create a new gameability such that it is essential to enter the game ball into the second start opening 34 by operating the game ball launch button 26, and to improve the interest of the game. it can.

E16. Modification 16:
Although the pachinko machine 10 is configured such that the game ball launched by the game ball launching mechanism 81 can be released from the guide rail 31 by operating the operation handle 25, the game ball launch button It may be configured such that the game ball launched by the game ball launching mechanism 81 is not released from the guide rail 31 by operating 26.

  Specifically, when an area in which a game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 and released from the guide rail 31 circulates is defined as a circulation area, the operation handle 25 is played by the operation handle 25 being operated. The game ball launched by the ball launching mechanism 81 is configured to be released from the guide rail 31 to the circulation region. On the other hand, the game ball launch button 26 is configured so that the game ball launched by the game ball launch mechanism 81 when the game ball launch button 26 is operated is not released from the guide rail 31 to the distribution area.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 may have a configuration described below.

  FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the configuration of the game board 30 in the modification 16. As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 10 in this modification is distributed as a guiding means for guiding the game balls launched by the game ball launching mechanism 81 and not released from the guide rail 31 to the distribution area. A mechanism 34b and a guide rail 34c are provided. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to this modification includes a second start port 34d at a position where a game ball that has circulated through the guide rail 34c can enter.

  A game ball that has been launched by the game ball launching mechanism 81 and that has not been released from the guide rail 31 to the circulation area flows through the guide rail 31 in a direction opposite to that when the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81. Then, it is distributed to the guide rail 34c by the distribution mechanism 34b, and then enters the second starting port 34d.

  FIG. 73 is an explanatory view showing a state in which a game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 enters the second start port 34d.

  As shown in FIG. 73 (a), the game ball PB launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 flows through the guide rail 31 in the direction of the flow area.

  As shown in FIG. 73 (b), when the game ball PB passes the position where the distribution mechanism 34b is installed, the distribution mechanism 34b that closes the guide rail 31 is provided from the game ball launching mechanism 81. The guide rail 31 is rotated in the direction to open by the propelling force, and the guide rail 31 is circulated in the direction of the circulation region. After the game ball PB has passed, the distribution mechanism 34b rotates again in the direction to close the guide rail 31. The game balls PB that have not been released from the guide rail 31 to the distribution area flow through the guide rail 31 in the direction opposite to that when the game balls PB are fired from the game ball launching mechanism 81.

  As shown in FIG. 73 (c), the game balls PB that circulate in the direction opposite to the direction when the guide rail 31 is fired from the game ball launching mechanism 81 without being released from the guide rail 31 to the circulation region are 34b is distributed to the guide rail 34c, and then enters the second starting port 34d.

  By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to create new game characteristics such that the game ball launched by the game ball launching mechanism 81 is not released from the guide rail 31 when the game ball launch button 26 is operated.

  In addition, the second start is provided with a distribution mechanism 34b and a guide rail 34c for guiding the game balls that have not been released from the guide rail 31 to the circulation area, and the game balls guided by the distribution mechanism 34b and the guide rail 34c can enter. Since the mouth 34d is provided, a new operation such as operating the operation handle 25 or the game ball launch button 26 so as not to release the game ball from the guide rail 31 to the circulation area in order to enter the second start port 34d. A game can be created.

  Furthermore, in a normal gaming machine, the guide rail 31 is configured so as not to be seen by the player due to its structure. Therefore, the game ball that is launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 and circulates through the guide rail 31, then circulates in the reverse direction in the guide rail 31, circulates through the distribution mechanism 34 b and the guide rail 34 c, and enters the second start port 34 d. Is not visible to the player. Thus, for example, while the first symbol is variably displayed, the player operates the game ball launch button 26 to cause the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 to enter the second start port 34d, and When the variation time of the symbol of 1 is shortened to a time shorter than the preset variation time, the process of the game ball from the game ball launching mechanism 81 until it enters the second start port 34d is determined by the player. Since it cannot be visually recognized, it is possible to make the player recognize as if the game ball launch button 26 itself has a function of shifting the change display of the first symbol to the stop display. As well as creating, you can improve the interest of the game.

  In this modified example, the distribution mechanism 34b and the guide rail 34c are provided as guide means until the game ball that has not been released from the guide rail 31 enters the second start opening 34d. A recess may be formed on the rail 31. A second start port 34d may be provided inside the recess. The game balls that have not been released from the guide rail 31 flow through the guide rail 31 in the reverse direction, and are guided to the second start port 34d by dropping into the recess, and then enter the second start port 34. By doing in this way, the distribution mechanism 34b and the guide rail 34c can be omitted, and the structure can be simplified.

E17. Modification 17:
In the above embodiment and the modification, the configuration in which the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 by the operation of the game ball launch button 26 is based on the program control process (game ball launch control process) executed by the main MPU 62. Although realized, a configuration in which a game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 by operating the game ball launch button 26 may be realized by a mechanical structure. For example, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the game ball launch button 26 and an internal gear that operates by rotating the operation handle 25 are mechanically connected via a plurality of gears or the like. When the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game gear is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 with a predetermined launch intensity by operating the internal gear. By adopting such a configuration, the program control process related to the operation of the game ball launch button 26 can be simplified or omitted.

  As an example, when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the internal gear operates larger than when the operation handle 25 is operated with the maximum amount of rotation operation, so that the operation handle 25 is operated. The game ball may be launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 with a launch strength higher than the maximum launch strength. With this configuration, the program control process related to the operation of the game ball launch button 26 in the modified example 15 can be simplified or omitted.

E18. Modification 18:
Other types of pachinko machines different from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines that release a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball enters a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a right by generating a right, a pachinko machine equipped with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball and the like.

  In addition, a non-ballistic gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotating the reel by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has passed, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body that is supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a take-in device. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts rotating the reel.

  In addition, in the above embodiment, a part of the function realized by software may be realized by hardware, or a part of the function realized by hardware may be realized by software.

F. About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments, etc .:
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

<Feature A group>
The feature A group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Feature A1]
The first symbol displayed on the first symbol display means (the first symbol display portion 37a) is used as a game ball to the first ball entering portion (center side first start port 33, right side first start port 44). When the first variation time set in advance as a variation time, which is a time for variably displaying the first symbol, is displayed when the first variation condition based on the entry of the ball is met, First symbol control means (main side MPU 62, sound light side MPU 92) for stopping and displaying the first symbol;
The second symbol displayed on the second symbol display means (second symbol display part 37b) is a second symbol based on the game ball entering the second ball entry part (second start port 34). The second symbol is displayed in a variable manner when the variation condition is satisfied, and the second symbol is stopped and displayed when a second variation time set in advance as a variation time, which is a time during which the second symbol is variably displayed. 2 design control means (main side MPU 62, sound light side MPU 92),
Fluctuation time shortening means (function to execute step S504) for executing a variation time shortening process for shortening the variation time of the first symbol to a time shorter than the first variation time;
A gaming machine comprising
The variation time shortening means includes:
When the first symbol and the second symbol are variably displayed, the variation time shortening process is executed based on the combination of the second symbols to be stopped and displayed by the second symbol control means. (Step S801, Step S1001)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature A1, since the variation time shortening process for shortening the variation time of the first symbol to a time shorter than the first variation time is executed, for example, the first variation time set in advance in a predetermined game time When the game time is long, the fluctuation time shortening process is executed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being bored due to the concentration of the game in the predetermined game round. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature A2]
A gaming machine according to feature A1,
The variation time shortening means includes:
When the first symbol and the second symbol are variably displayed, the variation time shortening process is executed based on the combination of the first symbols that the first symbol control means stops and displays. Is determined (step S1201).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature A2, the fluctuation time shortening means is based on the combination of the first symbols that the first symbol control means stops and displays when the first symbol and the second symbol are variably displayed. It is determined whether or not to execute the variation time reduction process. Therefore, the combination of the first symbols displayed by the first symbol control means is different depending on whether or not the variation time reduction process is executed. Therefore, the player can predict the combination of the first symbols to be stopped and displayed by the first symbol control means by recognizing whether or not the variation time shortening process is executed, which is different from conventional expectations. A feeling and game nature can be given.

[Feature A3]
A gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2,
The probability that the second symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination in which the variation time reduction process is executed (big hit and small hit) is more than the probability that the second symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination in which the variation time reduction process is not executed. Is also set to be higher (FIG. 8: success / failure table for the second starting port).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature A3, the variation time shortening process can be executed with a high probability.

[Feature A4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3,
The variation time shortening means includes:
After the first symbol starts variable display, the second symbol starts variable display,
The first symbol combination that the first symbol control means stops and displays does not satisfy a specific condition, and the second symbol combination that the second symbol control means stops and displays satisfies the specific condition The game machine is characterized in that the fluctuation time shortening process is executed.

  According to the feature A4, when there is a predetermined process executed when the first symbol combination satisfies a specific condition or when the second symbol combination satisfies a specific condition, It can be avoided that both the first symbol and the second symbol satisfy the specific condition and the execution conditions of the predetermined process compete.

[Feature A5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4,
The second variation condition is:
While established based on the entrance to the second entrance part during the period when the second symbol is not variably displayed,
A gaming machine that is not established based on a ball entering the second ball entry portion during a period in which the second symbol is variably displayed.

  According to the feature A5, the second variation condition is established based on the entrance to the second entrance part during the period in which the second symbol is not variably displayed, while the second symbol is variably displayed. It does not hold based on the ball entering the second ball entry part during a certain period. In other words, if there is a game ball entering the second ball entry part during the period in which the second symbol is variably displayed, it has a so-called hold function for holding the game ball from entering. Absent. Therefore, it is easy for the player to control the timing at which the second variation condition is satisfied. As a result, the player can easily control the timing for executing the variation time shortening process.

[Feature A6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5,
The variation time shortening means stops the first symbol displaying the variation by using the timing when the second symbol performing the variation display is stopped. Executing the variation time shortening process for shortening the variation time of the symbol to a time shorter than the first variation time,
The first variation time is determined by lottery from a plurality of preset variation times,
The second variation time is determined by lottery from a plurality of preset variation times,
An expected value of the second variation time determined by the lottery is shorter than an expected value of the first variation time determined by the lottery.

  If the second variation time is longer than the first variation time, the second symbol is displayed in a stopped state when the second symbol starts variation display after the first symbol starts variation display. Since the first symbol is stopped and displayed earlier than the first symbol, the first symbol that is displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed at the timing when the second symbol is stopped and displayed. It is not possible to execute the fluctuation time shortening process for shortening the fluctuation time to a time shorter than the first fluctuation time.

  According to the feature A6, since the expected value of the second variation time determined by the lottery is shorter than the expected value of the first variation time determined by the lottery, the first symbol is displayed after the first symbol starts the variation display. Even when the symbol of 2 starts to display the variation, the variation time shortening process can be executed.

[Feature A7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6,
The second entrance part (second start port 34) is from the first entrance part (center side first start port 33, right side first start port 44) in the direction in which the game ball flows down. A gaming machine characterized by being arranged upstream.

  When the second entrance is located downstream from the first entrance, if the game ball enters the first entrance, the second entrance also The game ball enters a state where it is easy to enter, and a variation time reduction process unintended by the player is executed.

  According to the feature A7, since the second incoming ball portion is arranged upstream of the first incoming ball portion with respect to the direction in which the game ball flows down, the first incoming ball portion has a gaming ball. Although the ball is entered, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the second ball entry part, and it is possible to suppress execution of the variation time shortening process that is not intended by the player.

[Feature A8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7,
An entrance that restricts the entry of game balls into the second entrance part and allows entry of game balls into the second entrance part only when a specific entry condition is satisfied. A gaming machine comprising a ball limiting mechanism (non-electrically-operated article 34a).

  According to the feature A8, since the entrance restriction mechanism is provided, it is possible to suppress entry of game balls unintended by the player into the second entrance part.

[Feature A9]
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8,
Providing production execution means for performing production,
In the case where the first symbol is displaying variation, and the variation time shortening means executes the variation time shortening process,
The production execution means
A game machine characterized by executing a stop display effect (skip effect) that suggests that the first symbol that is variably displayed is stopped.

  According to the feature A9, since the stop display effect is executed, the player can recognize that the variation time reduction process is executed.

[Feature A10]
A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A9,
Providing production execution means for performing production,
The production execution means
When the first variation condition is satisfied and the first symbol starts variation display, the first effect (first symbol effect) is executed,
After the first variation condition is established and the first symbol starts variation display, the second variation condition is established and the second symbol starts variation display, and A game machine characterized by executing a second effect (a non-skippable effect, a jackpot notification effect) when the variable time shortening means determines not to execute the variable time shortening process.

  According to the feature A10, when the variation time shortening means determines not to execute the variation time shortening process, the second effect is performed, so that the player recognizes that the variation time shortening process is not performed. Can be made.

[Feature A11]
The gaming machine according to Feature A10,
The production execution means
In the case where the first symbol is variably displayed and the second effect (non-skippable effect, jackpot notification effect) is executed,
An effect to be executed as the second effect is selected from a plurality of effects set in advance according to the remaining time of the first fluctuation time (step S3302).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature A11, since the effect to be executed as the second effect is selected from a plurality of effects set in advance according to the remaining time of the first variation time, the first symbol is stopped and displayed. An effect according to the timing can be executed, and an inflection and a story can be given to the effect. In addition, since the time required for the second effect is shorter than the first change time, the first change time even if the second effect ends or the second effect ends. It is possible to suppress such an event that there is a surplus, and the second effect can be executed as an effect that does not give the player a sense of incongruity.

[Feature A12]
A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A11,
Providing production execution means for performing production,
The production execution means
A guidance effect for guiding that there is a possibility that the first symbol may stop display when entering the second pitching part during a period in which the first symbol is variably displayed is executed. A gaming machine.

  According to the feature A12, since the guidance effect is executed, if the player enters the second entrance during the period in which the first symbol is variably displayed, there is a possibility that the first symbol is stopped and displayed. Can recognize that there is.

<Feature B group>
The feature B group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Feature B1]
The first symbol displayed on the first symbol display means (the first symbol display portion 37a) is used as a game ball to the first ball entering portion (center side first start port 33, right side first start port 44). When the first variation time set in advance as a variation time, which is a time for variably displaying the first symbol, is displayed when the first variation condition based on the entry of the ball is met, First symbol control means (main side MPU 62, sound light side MPU 92) for stopping and displaying the first symbol;
The second symbol displayed on the second symbol display means (second symbol display part 37b) is a second symbol based on the game ball entering the second ball entry part (second start port 34). The second symbol is displayed in a variable manner when the variation condition is satisfied, and the second symbol is stopped and displayed when a second variation time set in advance as a variation time, which is a time during which the second symbol is variably displayed. 2 design control means (main side MPU 62, sound light side MPU 92),
Fluctuation time shortening means (function to execute step S504) for executing a variation time shortening process for shortening the variation time of the first symbol to a time shorter than the first variation time;
Shortening promotion means that enables the player to intentionally prompt the execution of the fluctuation time shortening process by the fluctuation time shortening means (the position where the game ball can be entered when the game ball is launched at the maximum firing strength). 2 the configuration of the game board 30 provided with the start opening 34, the game ball launch button 26),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising.

  According to the feature B1, since the variation time shortening process for shortening the variation time of the first symbol to a time shorter than the first variation time is executed, for example, the first variation time preset in a predetermined game time When the game time is long, the fluctuation time shortening process is executed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being bored due to the concentration of the game in the predetermined game round. In addition, since the player can intentionally prompt the execution of the variation time shortening process, the player can be prompted to execute the variation time reduction process at a desired timing. For example, if a player feels that he / she cannot expect a big hit in a predetermined game time and wants to end the predetermined game time early, the player intentionally prompts the execution of the variable time reduction process, and the predetermined game time Can be finished early. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being distracted and bored at each game time, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature B2]
A gaming machine according to feature B1,
The variation time shortening means includes:
When the first symbol and the second symbol are variably displayed, the variation time shortening process is executed based on the combination of the second symbols to be stopped and displayed by the second symbol control means. Whether or not
The shortening promotion means enables a player to urge the player to intentionally establish the second variation condition.

  According to the feature B2, it is possible to simplify the mechanism that enables the player to intentionally prompt the execution of the variation time reduction process. That is, by allowing the player to intentionally prompt the second variation condition to be established, the second symbol variation display by the second symbol control means is prompted. As a result, the execution of the variation time shortening process is urged based on the combination of the second symbols that are stopped and displayed by the second symbol control means.

[Feature B3]
A gaming machine according to feature B2,
An operating means (operating handle 25) for a player to operate to fire a game ball;
The shortening promoting means includes operation assisting means (game ball launch button 26) for assisting the operation by the player,
The operation assisting means, when operated by the player, increases the launch intensity of the game ball launched by the operation of the operation means to increase the probability that the game ball enters the second entrance part. A game machine characterized by executing a firing intensity adjustment process to adjust to the above.

  According to the feature B3, since the operation assisting unit is provided, it is possible to facilitate an operation to be performed by the player in order to intentionally prompt the player to execute the variation time shortening process by the variation time shortening unit.

[Feature B4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3,
An operation means for a player to operate to fire a game ball;
The second entrance portion is a position where the game ball launched at the maximum strength enters when the operation means is operated by the player so that the launch strength of the game ball becomes the maximum strength. A gaming machine characterized by being arranged in

  According to the feature B4, the second entrance portion is arranged at a position where the game ball enters when the operation means is operated by the player so that the launch intensity of the game ball becomes the maximum intensity. Therefore, the player can enter the game ball into the second entrance part by easy operation of the operation means. That is, the player can intentionally enter the game ball into the second entrance part by easy operation of the operation means, and as a result, the execution of the variation time shortening process by the variation time shortening means Can be intentionally encouraged.

  The inventions of the above-described feature A group and feature B group solve the following problems.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, various effects are performed according to various gaming states for the purpose of improving the fun of gaming. For example, in each game time, an effect is executed according to the symbol variation time in the game time.

  However, when the variation time of the symbol in a predetermined game round is long, there is a problem that the player loses concentration with respect to the game and becomes bored, and the interest of the game is reduced.

  Here, in the gaming machines as described above, improvement of technology is desired for the purpose of suppressing a decrease in the interest of the game and further improving the interest of the game.

<Feature C group>
The feature C group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof.
[Feature C1]
The first symbol control means (main-side MPU 62) for variably displaying the first symbol displayed by the first symbol display device (first symbol display unit 37a) triggered by the game ball entering the first pitching portion. , Sound side MPU92),
The second symbol control means (main-side MPU 62) for variably displaying the second symbol displayed by the second symbol display device (second symbol display unit 37b) when the game ball enters the second pitching portion. , Sound side MPU92),
A gaming machine comprising
Although the second symbol control means starts the variable display of the second symbol when the first symbol control means is variably displaying the first symbol,
The first symbol control means prohibits starting the variable display of the first symbol when the second symbol control means causes the second symbol to be variably displayed (second embodiment and second embodiment). Fluctuation start processing for the first start port in the third embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  When executing a predetermined process having a correlation between the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display, when the second symbol variation display, the first symbol variation display When the game is started, there may be a case where difficulty occurs in executing the predetermined process, or a case where a game machine has a problem.

  According to the feature C1, the second symbol control means performs the first symbol control despite the fact that the first symbol control means starts the variation display of the second symbol when the first symbol control means displays the variation of the first symbol. The means prohibits starting the variable display of the first symbol when the second symbol control means displays the second symbol in a variable manner. That is, the second symbol variation display may be started while the first symbol variation display, but the first symbol variation display is not started during the second symbol variation display. This makes it possible to avoid the difficulty related to the execution of the predetermined process and the problem related to the gameability of the gaming machine.

[Feature C2]
A gaming machine according to feature C1,
The first symbol control means
When the second symbol control means is variably displaying the second symbol, and the second symbol combination that is stopped and displayed by the second symbol control means is a combination that satisfies a specific condition. Only, it is prohibited to start the variation display of the first symbol (variation start processing for the first start port in the third embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to feature C2, the first symbol control means prohibits the start of variable display of the first symbol, and the second symbol control means indicates that the second symbol is variably displayed. Thus, the second symbol control means is limited to the combination of the second symbols that the second symbol control means stops and displays so as to satisfy a specific condition. In other cases, the second symbol control means performs the second symbol control. Can be displayed in a variable manner when the first symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, compared to the control for prohibiting the start of the variable display of the first symbol in all cases where the second symbol control means displays the variable of the second symbol, the first symbol of the first symbol is more frequently used. The variable display can be started.

[Feature C3]
A gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2,
The first symbol control means
When the first symbol is variably displayed, the first symbol is stopped and displayed when a game ball enters the second ball entry portion (first variation stop process).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature C3, the first symbol can be stopped and displayed when the game ball enters the second ball entry unit. For example, when the variation time of the first symbol set in advance in a predetermined game round is long, the player causes the first symbol to stop and be displayed by causing the player to enter the second ball part. It is possible to prevent the player from being distracted and bored in the predetermined game times, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature C4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3,
The second entrance part (second start port 34)
A gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine is arranged at a position where a player can intentionally enter a game ball.

  According to the feature C4, the player can intentionally display the second symbol in a variable manner. In addition, when the first symbol is variably displayed, the first symbol can be stopped and displayed when the player enters the second pitching portion, so that the player intentionally One symbol can be stopped and displayed.

[Feature C5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4,
A gaming machine comprising assisting means (game ball launch button 26) for assisting a player to intentionally enter a game ball into the second ball entry section.

  According to the feature C5, since the auxiliary means is provided, it is easy for the player to intentionally enter the game ball into the second ball entry unit. In addition, when the first symbol is variably displayed, the first symbol can be stopped and displayed when the game ball enters the second pitching portion. Makes it easy for a person to intentionally stop and display the first symbol.

  The invention of the above-mentioned feature C group solves the following problems.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, various processes have been added and improved for the purpose of improving the fun of games.

  However, with the addition and improvement of various processes, there are problems such as difficulty in executing a predetermined process and problems in game play.

  Here, in order to avoid the above problem, further technical improvement is desired.

<Feature D group>
The feature D group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof.
[Feature D1]
First symbol display means (first symbol display unit 37a) for starting the variation display of the first symbol triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first pitching unit,
A second symbol display means (second symbol display unit 37b) for starting the variation display of the second symbol, triggered by the game ball entering the second pitching unit;
Production execution means for performing production,
A gaming machine comprising
The production execution means
When the first symbol starts a variable display and the second symbol starts a variable display,
Based on the time from when the second symbol variation display is started until the first symbol is stopped, the effect to be executed triggered by the start of the second symbol variation display is determined (step). (S1501, step S3302)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature D1, various effects can be executed according to the time from when the second symbol variation display is started until the first symbol is stopped. In addition, since the effect to be executed is determined with the start of the variable display of the second symbol, the player can be made to recognize the start of the variable display of the second symbol. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature D2]
A gaming machine according to feature D1,
The first symbol display means includes:
When the first symbol is variably displayed, the first symbol is stopped and displayed when a game ball enters the second pitching portion (first variation stop process).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature D2, in the gaming machine that causes the first symbol to stop and display when the game ball enters the second pitching portion, the player can start the variable symbol display of the second symbol. An effect of recognizing the stop display of the first symbol can be executed. Therefore, by executing the effect, the player strongly recognizes that the game ball has entered the second entrance part, the start of the second symbol change display, and the first symbol stop display. Can be made.

[Feature D3]
A gaming machine according to Feature D1 or Feature D2,
The second entrance part is arranged at a position where the player can intentionally enter the game ball (position where the game ball can be entered when the game ball is launched at the maximum launch intensity). A gaming machine characterized by

  According to the feature D3, since the second entrance portion is arranged at a position that allows the player to intentionally enter the game ball, the player intentionally uses the second symbol. Fluctuation display can be started. Then, when the effect determined by the effect execution unit in the feature D1 is executed, the second symbol variation table is started by intentionally causing the player to enter the second entrance part. Can be recognized.

[Feature D4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3,
A gaming machine comprising assisting means (game ball launch button 26) for assisting a player to intentionally enter a game ball into the second ball entry section.

  According to the feature D4, since the player is provided with auxiliary means for assisting the player to intentionally enter the game ball into the second entrance part, the player intentionally enters the second entrance part. It becomes easy to enter the ball, and it becomes easy to intentionally start the variable display of the second symbol. Then, when the effect determined by the effect execution unit in the feature D1 is executed, the player can intentionally enter the game ball into the second ball entering unit, whereby the variation display of the second symbol is displayed. It can be recognized that it has started.

[Feature D5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4,
When the second symbol starts a variable display while the first symbol is a variable display,
The production execution means
As the effect to be executed based on the time from the start of the variable symbol display of the second symbol to the time when the first symbol is stopped, the variable symbolic display of the first symbol is stopped. A gaming machine characterized by executing a suggested stop display effect (skip effect).

  According to the feature D5, by executing the stop display effect, the player can recognize the start of the variation display of the second symbol, and the first symbol can recognize the stop display.

<Feature E group>
The feature E group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Feature E1]
The first special information is acquired when the game ball enters the first ball club, and the second special information is acquired when the game ball enters the second ball club. Information acquisition means;
A first symbol display means (first symbol display unit 37a) for displaying a first symbol based on the first special information;
A second symbol display means (second symbol display unit 37b) for displaying a second symbol based on the second special information;
Based on the first special information, a first display image that is an image corresponding to the first symbol (an image displayed in the first liquid crystal symbol display area 41b) is displayed, and the second special information is displayed. An image display means for displaying a second display image which is an image corresponding to the second symbol (an image displayed in the second liquid crystal symbol display area 41c),
A gaming machine comprising
The image display means includes
When the first symbol and the second symbol are variably displayed, the display image has a size for displaying at least one of the first display image and the second display image. The gaming machine is characterized in that it is determined based on the corresponding special information (value of the jackpot random number counter C1).

  According to the feature E1, the display size of at least one of the first display image and the second display image is determined based on the special information corresponding to the display image. It is possible to cause the player who has recognized the display image to guess the content of the special information corresponding to the display image, and to give the player a sense of expectation or urgency.

[Feature E2]
A gaming machine according to feature E1,
The image display means includes
When the first symbol and the second symbol are variably displayed, the display image has a size for displaying at least one of the first display image and the second display image. A game machine characterized in that it is determined based on a degree of advantage of the corresponding special information for the player.

  According to the feature E2, the display size of at least one of the first display image and the second display image is determined based on the degree of advantage for the player regarding the special information corresponding to the display image. The player who has recognized the display image displayed on the image display means can guess the degree of advantage of the special information corresponding to the display image with respect to the player, and can give the player a sense of expectation.

[Feature E3]
A gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2,
The image display means includes
When the first symbol and the second symbol are variably displayed,
When the first special information is more advantageous to the player than the second special information, the first display image is displayed larger than the second display image,
When the second special information is more advantageous to the player than the first special information, the second display image is displayed larger than the first display image.

  According to the feature E3, since the display image corresponding to the special information that is advantageous to the player is displayed larger than the other display image, it corresponds to the special information that is advantageous to the player. The displayed image can be noticed, and a sense of expectation can be given. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature E4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3,
When the first symbol and the second symbol are variably displayed,
The gaming machine characterized in that the first symbol display means stops and displays the first symbol when a game ball enters the second pitching unit.

  According to the feature E4, since the first symbol is stopped and displayed when the game ball enters the second entrance part, the player can enter the game ball into the second entrance part. Thus, the first symbol variation display can be stopped and displayed in a short time. At that time, the display size of at least one of the first display image and the second display image is determined based on the special information corresponding to the display image, so that the display image displayed on the image display means is displayed. Can recognize the contents of the special information corresponding to the display image, and can give the player a sense of expectation.

  Note that the invention of the above-described feature D group and feature E group solves the following problems.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, various effects are performed according to various gaming states for the purpose of improving the fun of gaming.

  Here, in the gaming machine as described above, further technical improvement is desired for the purpose of improving the interest of the game.

<Feature F group>
The feature F group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Feature F1]
Game ball launching means for launching a game ball into the game area;
A ball entrance portion (second start port 34) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Detecting means for detecting the entrance of the game ball into the entrance part;
A signal is output when the game ball is launched with the launch intensity satisfying a predetermined launch condition by the game ball launching means, but the entrance of the game ball is not detected by the detection means. Signal output means for outputting (abnormality detection processing in the fourth embodiment);
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature F1, the state of the gaming machine can be detected based on the signal output by the signal output means. For example, in the case where a ball entry part is provided at a position where a game ball launched with a launch intensity satisfying a predetermined launch condition is easy to enter, an abnormality of the gaming machine based on a signal output by the signal output means, Unauthorized games can be detected. If a signal output from the signal output means is received, an event that the game ball launching means does not normally control the launch intensity of the game ball, or the entrance or surrounding area is normal due to fraud or abnormality. It is possible to detect various states of the gaming machine such as an event that the entry of the game ball into the ball entering part is hindered.

[Feature F2]
The gaming machine according to Feature F1,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information;
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
With
The said entrance part (2nd starting port 34) is an entrance part from which the said information acquisition means will acquire the said special information with the entrance of the game ball to the said entrance part. To play.

  Injustices and abnormalities related to the incoming part that acquires special information triggered by the entry of a game ball are serious, and it is desirable to detect such irregularities and abnormalities early. According to the feature F2, based on the signal output from the signal output means, it is possible to detect at an early stage an injustice or abnormality related to a ball-entry unit that acquires special information triggered by the game ball entering.

[Feature F3]
A gaming machine according to Feature F1 or Feature F2,
The signal output means includes
When the detection means does not detect the entrance of the game ball into the entrance part within a predetermined time after the game ball launch means launches the game ball with the launch intensity satisfying the predetermined launch condition, The signal is output (steps S4206 and S4208).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature F3, the signal output means causes the game ball launching means to launch the game ball with a launch intensity satisfying a predetermined launch condition and the detection means Since a signal is output when it is not detected, fraud or abnormality can be detected earlier based on the signal.

[Feature F4]
A gaming machine according to Feature F1 or Feature F2,
The signal output means includes
Based on the number of times that the detection means did not detect the entrance of the game ball into the entrance part within a predetermined time after the game ball launching means launched the game ball with the launch intensity satisfying the predetermined launch condition. The signal is output (step S4215).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to feature F4, fraud or abnormality is effectively detected in a gaming machine that can occur in a normal state even when a game ball launched with a launch intensity satisfying a predetermined launch condition by the game ball launching unit does not enter the entrance part. can do.

[Feature F5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4,
An operation means for a player to turn to cause the game ball launching means to launch a game ball, wherein the game ball launching means has a launch intensity corresponding to a turning operation amount of the operation means by the player. An operation means (operation handle 25) for firing a ball is provided,
The firing strength satisfying the predetermined launching condition is equivalent to the launching strength of the game ball fired by the game ball launching means when the player rotates the operation means so that the amount of rotation operation is maximized. A gaming machine characterized by a launching intensity of.

  According to the feature F5, when the player turns the operation means so that the amount of turning operation is maximized, a game that is launched with a launch strength equivalent to the launch strength of the game ball launched by the game ball launching means When the ball entry part is provided at a position where the ball is easy to enter, an abnormality of the gaming machine or an illegal game can be detected based on the signal output by the signal output means.

[Feature F6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F5,
Auxiliary operation means operated by a player to cause the game ball launching means to launch a game ball, wherein the game ball is fired to the game ball launching means at a predetermined launch intensity by operation of the auxiliary operation means by the player Auxiliary operation means (game ball launch button 26) to be
The gaming machine characterized in that the firing strength satisfying the predetermined launching condition is a launching strength of a game ball launched by the game ball launching means when a player operates the auxiliary operation means.

  According to the feature F6, when the player has a ball entry part at a position where the game ball launched with the launch intensity of the game ball launched by the game ball launching unit when the player operates the auxiliary operation unit is easy to enter. In addition, it is possible to detect an abnormality in the gaming machine or an illegal game based on the signal output from the signal output means.

  The invention of the above-mentioned feature F group solves the following problems.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, various processes and structures are improved for the purpose of improving the fun of gaming.

  However, with these improvements in processing and structure, there is a problem in that a malfunction of the gaming machine occurs or fraud by the player cannot be prevented.

  In such a gaming machine, it is preferable to be able to quickly detect malfunctions of the gaming machine and fraud by the player in order to improve game soundness while improving the interest of the game.

<Feature G group>
The feature G group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Feature G1]
The first symbol displayed on the first symbol display means (the first symbol display portion 37a) is used as a game ball to the first ball entering portion (center side first start port 33, right side first start port 44). A first symbol control means (main side MPU 62, sound light side MPU 92) for variably displaying triggered by the establishment of the first fluctuation condition based on the entering of the ball,
The second symbol displayed on the second symbol display means (second symbol display part 37b) is a second symbol based on the game ball entering the second ball entry part (second start port 34). Second symbol control means (main side MPU 62, sound light side MPU 92) for variably displaying triggered by the establishment of the fluctuation condition;
In addition to restricting the entry of the game ball into the second entrance part, and when the game ball enters the third entrance part (through gate 35a), the game to the second entrance part A ball entry limiting mechanism (non-electrical accessory 34a) that enables ball entry;
A gaming machine comprising
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the first entrance portion is arranged at a position where a game ball entered into the third entrance portion enters.

  According to the feature G1, when a game ball enters the first entrance after entering the third entrance, the entrance restriction mechanism enters the second entrance. The game ball can enter the second entrance part. As a result, it is possible to create a new gameability such that the game ball can be entered into the second entrance part on condition that the game ball enters the first entrance part.

[Feature G2]
A gaming machine according to feature G1,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first entrance part is disposed immediately below the third entrance part.

  According to the feature G2, the guide flow path for guiding the game ball that has entered the third entrance part to the first entrance part, and other game balls that have entered the third entrance part are the first It is possible to adopt a configuration in which a game ball that has entered the third entrance portion is entered into the first entrance portion without having a configuration for entering the entrance portion.

[Feature G3]
A gaming machine according to Feature G1 or Feature G2,
The first symbol control means stops and displays the first symbol when a first variation time set in advance as a variation time, which is a time for variably displaying the first symbol,
The second symbol control means stops and displays the second symbol when a second variation time set in advance as a variation time, which is a time for variably displaying the second symbol,
The gaming machine includes a variation time shortening unit that executes a variation time shortening process for shortening the variation time of the first symbol to a time shorter than the first variation time.
When the first symbol and the second symbol are variably displayed, the variation time shortening means is based on a combination of the second symbols that the second symbol control means stops and displays. A game machine characterized by determining whether or not to execute a variable time reduction process.

  According to the feature G3, since the variation time shortening process for shortening the variation time of the first symbol to a time shorter than the first variation time is executed, for example, the first variation time preset in a predetermined game time When the game time is long, the fluctuation time shortening process is executed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being bored due to the concentration of the game in the predetermined game round. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, in order to display the first symbol and the second symbol variably by the configuration of the feature G1, the game ball is moved to the second ball entrance part on condition that the game ball enters the first ball entrance part. It is necessary to enter the ball. Therefore, in order to execute the variation time shortening process described in the feature G3, it is necessary to allow the game ball to enter the first entrance portion and then enter the second entrance portion. It can be a condition, and a new game can be created.

[Feature G4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3,
The variation time shortening means includes:
When the first symbol and the second symbol are variably displayed, the variation time shortening process is executed based on the combination of the first symbols that the first symbol control means stops and displays. A game machine characterized by determining whether or not.

  According to the feature G4, the variation time shortening means is based on the combination of the first symbols that the first symbol control means stops and displays when the first symbol and the second symbol are variably displayed. It is determined whether or not to execute the variation time reduction process. Therefore, the combination of the first symbols displayed by the first symbol control means is different depending on whether or not the variation time reduction process is executed. Therefore, the player can predict the combination of the first symbols to be stopped and displayed by the first symbol control means by recognizing whether or not the variation time shortening process is executed, which is different from conventional expectations. A feeling and game nature can be given.

<Feature H group>
The feature H group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Feature H1]
A first operation means (operation handle 25);
Second operating means (game ball launch button 26);
A game ball launching unit (launch control device 80, game ball launching mechanism 81) that launches a game ball into the game area when the first operation unit or the second operation unit is operated;
A gaming machine comprising
The gaming area is
An area where the game ball launched by the game ball launching means cannot reach when the first operation means is operated, and is fired by the game ball launch means when the second operation means is operated. A game machine characterized by including a specific area (specific area SPA) that can be reached by the played game ball.

  According to the feature H1, the game area is an area where the game ball launched by the game ball launching means cannot reach when the first operation means is operated, and when the second operation means is operated. Since the game ball launched by the game ball launching unit includes a specific area that can be reached, a new game can be created by using the specific area. Since the specific area is an area that is reached only when a game ball is fired by operating the second operating means, creating a game where the operation of the second operating means is essential Can do.

[Feature H2]
A gaming machine according to feature H1,
The first operating means includes
It is equipped with a rotatable operation part
The game ball launching means includes
A gaming machine, wherein a gaming ball is launched into the gaming area with a firing intensity corresponding to a rotational operation amount of the rotational operation unit.

  According to the feature H2, the first operation means includes a rotation operation unit. Therefore, for example, when the second operation means is configured to cause the game ball launching means to fire the game ball by an operation different from the rotation operation, the operation methods of the first operation means and the second operation means are different. Thus, it is possible to create a game with various operability and to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature H3]
A gaming machine according to Feature H1 or Feature H2,
The specific area includes
There is provided a specific entrance portion (FIG. 71: second start port 34) into which the game ball launched by the game ball launching means can enter when the second operation means is operated. A featured gaming machine.

  According to the feature H3, since a specific entry portion is provided in a specific area, a game is created in which a game ball is made to enter the specific entry portion by operating the second operating means. can do. In other words, it is possible to create a game property in which the operation of the second operation means is indispensable in order to allow a game ball to enter a specific entrance part.

[Feature H4]
A gaming machine according to Feature H3,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information;
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
With
The specific entrance part is an entrance part in which the information acquisition unit acquires the special information when the game ball enters the specific entrance part. .

  According to the feature H4, the specific entry part is an entry part in which the information acquisition unit acquires special information when the game ball enters the specific entry part. It is possible to make the game ball enter the ball entry part of the game machine an important element in the game performance of the game machine. As a result, it is possible for the player to recognize that the operation of the second operation means for causing the game ball to enter the specific entrance part is the main feature of the game machine.

[Feature H5]
A gaming machine according to Feature H3 or Feature H4,
A ball entry part into which a game ball can enter, and a predetermined ball entry part (center side first start opening 33, right side first start opening 44) different from the specific entry part;
First symbol display means (first symbol display unit 37a) for starting the variation display of the first symbol triggered by the entry of the game ball into the predetermined pitching unit,
Second symbol display means (second symbol display unit 37b) for starting the variation display of the second symbol triggered by the entry of the game ball into the specific pitching unit;
With
The first symbol display means includes:
When the first symbol and the second symbol are variably displayed, the first symbol is stopped and displayed when the second symbol display means stops and displays the second symbol. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature H5, when the player operates the second operating means to cause the specific ball to enter the game ball when the first symbol is variably displayed, the second symbol is displayed. Starts changing display and then shifts to stop display. At that time, the first symbol also shifts from the variable display to the stop display. Therefore, when the first symbol is variably displayed, a new game characteristic can be created such that the player can stop the first symbol by operating the second operation means.

<Feature I group>
The feature group I is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Feature I1]
A first operation means (operation handle 25);
Second operating means (game ball launch button 26);
A game ball launching unit (launch control device 80, game ball launching mechanism 81) that launches a game ball into the game area when the first operation unit or the second operation unit is operated;
A gaming machine comprising
The launch intensity of the game ball launched by the game ball launching means when the second operation means is manipulated may be that the game ball launch means launches when the first operation means is manipulated. A gaming machine characterized by a launching intensity of game balls that cannot be played.

  According to the characteristic I1, the launch intensity of the game ball fired by the game ball launching means when the second operation means is operated is determined by the game ball launching means when the first operation means is operated. Since it is a launch intensity of a game ball that cannot be played, for example, an accessory or entry that can only be involved with a game ball that is launched with a launch intensity output by the game ball launch means only when the second operation means is operated. By providing a game element such as a ball, a new game can be created, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature I2]
A gaming machine according to feature I1,
The launch intensity of the game ball launched by the game ball launching means by operating the second operation means can be launched by the game ball launching means by operating the first operation means. A gaming machine characterized by being larger than the maximum launch strength of a game ball.

  According to the feature I2, when the second operation means is operated, the game ball launching means that can be fired by the game ball launching means when the first operation means is operated is fired larger than the maximum launch intensity of the game ball Since the game ball can be launched with strength, for example, by operating the second operation unit, the game ball launching unit can be launched by operating the first operation unit. It is possible to create a new gameability and improve the interest of the game by providing an accessory and a ball-entry unit that can only be involved with game balls launched with a launch intensity greater than the maximum launch intensity. it can.

[Feature I3]
A gaming machine according to Feature I1 or Feature I2,
The first operating means includes
It is equipped with a rotatable operation part
The game ball launching means includes
A gaming machine, wherein a gaming ball is launched into the gaming area with a firing intensity corresponding to a rotational operation amount of the rotational operation unit.

  According to the characteristic I3, the first operation means includes a rotation operation unit. Therefore, for example, when the second operation means is configured to cause the game ball launching means to fire the game ball by an operation different from the rotation operation, the operation methods of the first operation means and the second operation means are different. Thus, it is possible to create a game with various operability and to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature I4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3,
The gaming area is
An area where the game ball launched by the game ball launching means cannot reach when the first operation means is operated, and is fired by the game ball launch means when the second operation means is operated. A game machine characterized by including a specific area (specific area SPA) that can be reached by the played game ball.

  According to the characteristic I4, the game area is an area where the game ball launched by the game ball launching means cannot reach when the first operation means is operated, and when the second operation means is operated. Since the game ball launched by the game ball launching unit includes a specific area that can be reached, a new game can be created by using the specific area. Since the specific area is an area that is reached only when a game ball is fired by operating the second operating means, creating a game where the operation of the second operating means is essential Can do.

[Feature I5]
A gaming machine according to feature I4,
The specific area includes
There is provided a specific entrance portion (FIG. 71: second start port 34) into which the game ball launched by the game ball launching means can enter when the second operation means is operated. A featured gaming machine.

  According to the feature I5, since a specific entry portion is provided in a specific area, the game is created such that a game ball is made to enter the specific entry portion by operating the second operating means. can do. In other words, it is possible to create a game property in which the operation of the second operation means is indispensable in order to allow a game ball to enter a specific entrance part.

[Feature I6]
A gaming machine according to feature I5,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information;
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
With
The specific entrance part is an entrance part in which the information acquisition unit acquires the special information when the game ball enters the specific entrance part. .

  According to the characteristic I6, the specific entry part is an entry part in which the information acquisition unit acquires special information when the game ball enters the specific entry part. It is possible to make the game ball enter the ball entry part of the game machine an important element in the game performance of the game machine. As a result, it is possible for the player to recognize that the operation of the second operation means for causing the game ball to enter the specific entrance part is the main feature of the game machine.

[Feature I7]
A gaming machine according to Feature I5 or Feature I6,
A ball entry part into which a game ball can enter, and a predetermined ball entry part (center side first start opening 33, right side first start opening 44) different from the specific entry part;
First symbol display means (first symbol display unit 37a) for starting the variation display of the first symbol triggered by the entry of the game ball into the predetermined pitching unit,
Second symbol display means (second symbol display unit 37b) for starting the variation display of the second symbol triggered by the entry of the game ball into the specific pitching unit;
With
The first symbol display means includes:
When the first symbol and the second symbol are variably displayed, the first symbol is stopped and displayed when the second symbol display means stops and displays the second symbol. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature I7, when the player operates the second operation means to cause the specific ball to enter the game ball when the first symbol is variably displayed, the second symbol is displayed. Starts changing display and then shifts to stop display. At that time, the first symbol also shifts from the variable display to the stop display. Therefore, when the first symbol is variably displayed, a new game characteristic can be created such that the player can stop the first symbol by operating the second operation means.

<Feature J group>
The feature J group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof.
[Feature J1]
Game ball launching means for launching game balls;
First guiding means (FIG. 72: guide rail 31) for guiding the game ball launched from the game ball launching means;
A game sphere launched from the game sphere launching means, and a distribution area in which the game sphere released from the first guiding means circulates;
Second guiding means for guiding the game balls launched by the game ball launching means and not released from the first guiding means to the circulation area (FIG. 72: sorting mechanism 34b, guiding rail) 34c)
A specific entrance portion (FIG. 72: second start port 34d) into which a game ball guided by the second guide means can enter,
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature J1, the second guiding means for guiding the game ball launched by the gaming ball launching means and not released from the first guiding means to the distribution area, and the second guiding means Since the game ball guided by is provided with a specific ball entry unit that can enter, for example, the game component related to the game performance of the game machine, such as production, operation of an accessory, lottery processing, etc. It is possible to create a new game by executing with the entry to the ball.

[Feature J2]
A gaming machine according to feature J1,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information;
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
With
The specific entrance part is an entrance part in which the information acquisition unit acquires the special information when the game ball enters the specific entrance part. .

  According to the feature J2, the specific entry part is an entry part in which the information acquisition unit acquires special information when the game ball enters the specific entry part. It is possible to make the game ball enter the ball entry part of the game machine an important element in the game performance of the game machine.

[Feature J3]
A gaming machine according to feature J1 or feature J2,
A ball entry part into which a game ball can enter, a predetermined ball entry part (center side first start port 33, right side first start port 44) provided in the distribution area;
First symbol display means (first symbol display unit 37a) for starting the variation display of the first symbol triggered by the entry of the game ball into the predetermined pitching unit,
Second symbol display means (second symbol display unit 37b) for starting the variation display of the second symbol triggered by the entry of the game ball into the specific pitching unit;
With
The first symbol display means includes:
When the first symbol and the second symbol are variably displayed, the first symbol is stopped and displayed when the second symbol display means stops and displays the second symbol. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature J3, when the first symbol is variably displayed, if the game ball is entered into a specific pitching part, the second symbol starts variably display, and then the stop symbol is displayed. Transition. At that time, the first symbol also shifts from the variable display to the stop display. Therefore, when the first symbol is variably displayed, a new game characteristic can be created in which the first symbol is stopped and displayed by causing the game ball to enter a specific pitching portion.

<Feature K group>
The feature K group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Feature K1]
A first operation means (operation handle 25);
Second operating means (game ball launch button 26);
A game ball launching unit (launch control device 80, game ball launching mechanism 81) that launches a game ball when the first operation unit or the second operation unit is operated;
First guiding means (guidance rail 31) for guiding the game ball launched from the gaming ball launching means;
A game sphere launched from the game sphere launching means, and a distribution area in which the game sphere released from the first guiding means circulates;
A gaming machine comprising
The first operating means is configured such that a game ball emitted by the game ball emitting means can be released from the first guiding means by operating the first operating means. Regardless,
The second operation means is configured such that a game ball launched by the game ball launching means is not released from the first guide means when the second operation means is operated. To play.

  According to the feature K1, since the game ball launched by the game ball launching unit is not released from the first guiding unit when the second operation unit is operated, the operation of the second operation unit is performed. By providing an accessory that can be involved with a game ball that has been fired as a trigger and a ball-entry unit, it is possible to create a new game and improve the interest of the game.

[Feature K2]
A gaming machine according to the feature K1,
The first operating means includes
It is equipped with a rotatable operation part
The game ball launching means includes
A gaming machine, wherein a game ball is launched into a game area with a firing intensity corresponding to a rotation operation amount of the rotation operation unit.

  According to the feature K2, the first operation means includes a rotation operation unit. Therefore, for example, when the second operation means is configured to cause the game ball launching means to fire the game ball by an operation different from the rotation operation, the operation methods of the first operation means and the second operation means are different. Thus, it is possible to create a game with various operability and to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature K3]
A gaming machine according to feature K1 or feature K2,
Second guiding means for guiding the game balls launched by the game ball launching means and not released from the first guiding means to the circulation area (FIG. 72: sorting mechanism 34b, guiding rail) 34c)
A specific entrance portion (second start port 34d) into which a game ball guided by the second guide means can enter,
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature K3, the second guidance means for guiding the game ball that has not been released from the first guidance means to the circulation area, and the specific entry that allows the game ball guided by the second guidance means to enter. The first operation means or the second operation means is provided so that the game balls are not released from the first guide means to the circulation area in order to enter the game balls into the specific ball entry section. It is possible to create new playability such as operation.

[Feature K4]
A gaming machine described in feature K3,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information;
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
With
The specific entrance part is an entrance part in which the information acquisition unit acquires the special information when the game ball enters the specific entrance part. .

According to the feature K4, the specific entry part is an entry part in which the information acquisition unit acquires special information when the game ball enters the specific entry part. It is possible to make the game ball enter the ball entry part of the game machine an important element in the game performance of the game machine. As a result, the main feature of the gaming machine is that the gaming machine is operated so that the gaming ball is not released from the first guiding means to the distribution area in order to cause the gaming ball to enter the specific entry part. The player can be made aware that there is.

[Feature K5]
A gaming machine according to Feature K3 or Feature K4,
A ball entry part into which a game ball can enter, a predetermined ball entry part (center side first start port 33, right side first start port 44) provided in the distribution area;
First symbol display means (first symbol display unit 37a) for starting the variation display of the first symbol triggered by the entry of the game ball into the predetermined pitching unit,
Second symbol display means (second symbol display unit 37b) for starting the variation display of the second symbol triggered by the entry of the game ball into the specific pitching unit;
With
The first symbol display means includes:
When the first symbol and the second symbol are variably displayed, the first symbol is stopped and displayed when the second symbol display means stops and displays the second symbol. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature K5, when the first symbol is displayed in a variable manner, if the game ball is inserted into a specific ball-in part, the second symbol starts the variable display, and then the stop symbol is displayed. Transition. At that time, the first symbol also shifts from the variable display to the stop display. Therefore, when the first symbol is variably displayed, a new game characteristic can be created in which the first symbol is stopped and displayed by causing the game ball to enter a specific pitching portion.

  The invention of the above-mentioned feature G group, feature H group, feature I group, feature J group, and feature K group solves the following problems.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, various processes and structures are improved for the purpose of improving the fun of gaming.

  Here, in the gaming machines as described above, further technical improvements are desired for the purpose of creating new gaming properties.

  A configuration in which one or a plurality of configurations included in the feature A group to the feature K group is appropriately combined may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which the above features can be applied or applied to each feature is shown below.

  Pachinko machine: Launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player, and a start entrance ball that is provided in the game area and can enter a game ball flowing down the game area And the acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball having entered the start ball entrance section, and the information acquisition means when the game ball has entered the start ball entrance section. A gaming machine comprising storage means for storing special information.

  Revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, variably starting display of the plurality of pictures due to the operation of the start operation means, and due to the operation of the stop operation means In addition, the game machine is configured such that the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped when a predetermined time elapses and a privilege is given to the player according to the pattern after the stop.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modifications, and can be realized with various configurations without departing from the spirit thereof. For example, the technical features in the embodiments and the modifications corresponding to the technical features in each embodiment described in the summary section of the invention are to solve some or all of the above-described problems, or In order to achieve part or all of the effects, replacement or combination can be performed as appropriate. Further, if the technical feature is not described as essential in the present specification, it can be deleted as appropriate.

10 ... Pachinko machine 11 ... Outer frame 12 ... Pachinko machine body 13 ... Inner frame 14 ... Front door frame 15 ... Hinge 16 ... Hinge 17 ... Cylinder lock 18. ..Window 19 ... Glass unit 20 ... Upper plate 21 ... Lower plate 22 ... Discharge port 23 ... Lever 24 ... Direction operation button 25 ... Operation handle 25a ... Touch sensor 25b ... weight button 25c ... variable resistor 26 ... game ball launch button 30 ... game board 31 ... guide rail 31a ... inner rail part 31b ... outer rail part 32 ... General prize winning port 33 ... Center side first starting port 34 ... Second starting port 34a ... Non-electrical accessory 34b ... Distributing mechanism 34c ... Guiding rail 34d ... Second Start port 35a ... Through gate 35b ... Through gate 36 ... Variable winning device 36a ... Large winning port 36b ... Opening / closing door 36c ... Variable winning drive unit 37 ... Special figure unit 37a ... 1st design Display unit 37b ... 2nd symbol display unit 37c ... 1st hold display unit 38 ... Universal map unit 39 ... Round display unit 40 ... Variable display unit 41 ... Liquid crystal display device 41a. Display surface 41b ... Symbol display area for first liquid crystal 41c ... Symbol display area for second liquid crystal 42 ... Nail 43 ... Out port 44 ... Right first start port 44a ... Electrical accessory 44b ... Electric accessory drive unit 45 ... Main display unit 46 ... Speaker 47 ... Various lamps 51 ... First control unit 52 ... Second control unit 53 ... Third control unit 54 ... Tank 55 ... Tank rail 56 ... Case rail 60 ... Main controller 61 ... Main control board 62 ... Main side MPU
63 ... Main ROM
63a ... Attack table storage area 63b ... Distribution table storage area 63c ... Reach determination table storage area 63d ... Variation time table storage area 63e ... Stop result table storage area 63f ... Command Information storage area 64 ... Main side RAM
64a ... Lottery counter buffer 64b ... Holding information storage area 64c ... Judgment processing execution area 64d ... Electrical power holding area 64e ... Electric role execution area 64f ... Various counter areas 64g ... Various flag storage area 64h ... Prior determination processing result storage area 70 ... Payout control device 71 ... Payout device 80 ... Launch control device 81 ... Game ball launch mechanism 85 ... Power supply Device 86 ... Power failure monitoring circuit 90 ... Sound emission control device 91 ... Sound emission control board 92 ... Sound side MPU
93 ... Sound ROM
93a ... Production pattern table storage area 93b ... Fluctuation display pattern table storage area 94 ... Sound light side RAM
94a ... Various flag storage areas 94b ... Various counter areas 94c ... Lottery counter area 100 ... Display control device 101 ... Display control board 102 ... Display side MPU
103 ... Program ROM
104 ... Work RAM
106 ... Character ROM
107 ... Video RAM
150 ... Sorting mechanism 151 ... Entry part 152 ... Blade part 153 ... Shaft part 154 ... Departing part 155 ... Departing part Sync1 ... First synchronous display part Sync2. .. Second synchronization display

Claims (4)

First symbol display means for starting the variation display of the first symbol triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first pitching unit,
Second symbol display means for starting the variation display of the second symbol triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second pitching unit;
Production execution means for performing production,
A gaming machine comprising
The production execution means
When the first symbol starts a variable display and the second symbol starts a variable display,
Determining an effect to be executed in response to the start of the second symbol variation display based on the time from when the second symbol variation display is started until the first symbol is stopped and displayed. A featured gaming machine. The gaming machine according to claim 1,
The first symbol display means includes:
When the first symbol is variably displayed, the first symbol is stopped and displayed when a game ball enters the second pitching portion. A gaming machine according to claim 1 or claim 2,
The gaming machine, wherein the second entrance part is arranged at a position where a player can intentionally enter a game ball. A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
A gaming machine comprising assisting means for assisting a player to intentionally enter a game ball into the second ball entry unit.